Geodimeter

Software & Data communication

Ver. 10 Publ.No. 571 700 001

Modifications resulting from technical developments may be in the interest of our customers. Illustrations and specifications are therefore not binding, and are subject to change without prior notice. Trademarks Geodimeter, Geodat and Tracklight are registered trademarks and Constructor and Autolock are trademaks of Spectra Precision AB. All other trademarks mentioned in this publication are the property of their respective owners. Copyright by Spectra Precision AB, 1999. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrievel system, or translated in to any language in any form by any means without the written permission of Spectra Precision AB / Geodimeter. Tenth Edition Printed in Sweden 03.99. Publ.No. 571 700 001, Arkitektkopia AB.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents
Index Welcome to Geodimeter Software About the manual A B C

Part 1 - Memory Structure

Introduction Memory Structure 1.1 1.2

Part 2 - Memory Units

Introduction Internal Memory Geodat 500 2.1 2.3 2.6

Part 3 - Data Communication

Introduction Data Transfer Serial Communication 3.1 3.3 3.9

Part 4 - Software
Introduction Chapter 1 - Data Collecting U.D.S - P40 Define Label - P41 Enter Coordinates - P43 Pcode - P45 Chapter 2 - Edit & View Edit View 4.1

4.1.2 4.1.17 4.1.19 4.1.23

4.2.2 4.2.18

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 3 - Field Calculations Station Establishment - P20 Z/IZ - P21 Angle Meas - P22 SetOut - P23 RefLine - P24 Area/Vol Calc - P25 DistOb - P26 Obstructed Point - P28 RoadLine - P29 RoadLine3D - P39 MCF (Moving Coordinates Forward) - P27 COGO - P61 Angle Meas Plus - P32 Athletics - P60 Measure Coordinates - P30 Robotic Lite Appendix A - Label List Info Codes

4.3.2 4.3.41 4.3.48 4.3.56 4.3.65 4.3.84 4.3.91 4.3.100 4.3.107 4.3.134 4.3.228 4.3.243 4.3.307 4.3.331 4.3.335 4.3.341

INDEX

Index
A
A-parameter 4.3.138-139, 4.3.141 Activate Scalefactor 4.3.38 (P20) Pcode 4.1.23 (P45) Pointlist 4.3.34, 4.3.39 (P20) Weightfactor 4.3.40 (P20) Angle Meas 4.3.48 (P22) Angle Meas Plus 4.3.307 (P32) Area Calc 4.3.84 (P25) Area file 1.2-1.5 Area no 1.2-1.5 Arrange list 4.3.88 (P25) Arrow keys 4.2, 4.2.4-6 ASCII 3.10, 4.1.22, 4.1.25 Athletics 4.3.331 (P60) Attach computer 3.3-3.5 external device 3.3-3.5 Geodat 2.11, 3.3-3.5 Auto dup 4.1.5 (P40) incr 4.1.5 (P40) Automatic check 4.3.57 (P23) Change data 4.2.7-11 Change measuring mode 3.22 Check roadline 4.3.118-119 (P29), 4.3.180 (P39) set out points position 4.3.57 Choose program 4.2 storage unit 4.1.14 (P40) Circular arc 4.3.109 (P29), (P39) Clear memory 4.2.17 Clothoid (P29) 4.3.109 (P39) 4.3.139, 4.3.141 COGO 4.3.243 (P61) Combination of countdown and offset 4.3.128 (P29), 4.3.183 (P39) Commands serial 3.18 Command types 3.13 Communication Serial 3.10 Computer data output (Part 3) data recording (Part 3) Configuration 4.3.38-40 (P20) user defined output table 4.3 Connect devices 3.3-5 Coordinate deviation 4.3.58 Coordinates enter 4.1.19 (P43) measure 4.3.335 (P30) setout 4.3.60 (P23) setout 4.3.80 (P24) station (P20) Countdown to zero (P23) 4.3.61 (P29) 4.3.124 (P39) 4.3.188 A

B
Bad connection (Part 3) Baud rate 3.14-15 (Part 3) Boning height 4.3.206-207 (P39)

C
CII Measurements 4.3.49-55 Cable batteries (Part 3) RS 232C (Part 3) Calculate area 4.3.86 (P25) Call U.D.S 4.1.4, 4.1.6 Camber 4.3.164 (P39) Capacity unit 2.3, 2.7

INDEX

Create job file 1.3 pointcode library 4.1.24 (P45) subroutine 4.1.14 (P40) U.D.S 4.1.2 (P40) Cross section (P39)

D
Data storage 1.2-5 transfer 3.3-8 Data Communication 3.2-29 Station unit - Geodat 3.4 Control unit - Geodat 3.4 Station unit - Computer 3.5 Control unit - Computer 3.4 Station unit - Control unit 3.5 Program 54 - File transfer 3.6 Deactivation of PCODE 4.1.25 Define label 4.1.17 (P41) Delete file 4.2.5, 4.2.12 prompt 4.2.5 Directory 3.18, 4.2.6 Distob 4.3.91 (P26) Duplicating label type 4.1.4-5

File area 1.2-5 edit 4.2.5 job 1.2-5 transfer 3.2-9 Find file 4.2.5 label 4.2.5, 4.2.9 prompt 4.2.5 Find and change data 4.2.9-11

G
Geodat 2.6 Geo/L Geodimeter Language 3.12

H
Height establishment 4.3.2 (P20), 4.3.41 (P21) Height profile (P39) 4.3.144 Height setting out 4.3.56-64 (P23), 4.3.130 (P29)

I
Incrementing label type 4.1.5 Info messages 2.9, App. B Info 19 3.7 Insert prompt 4.2.5 Internal Memory 2.3

E
Edit 4.2.2-17 End label types 4.1.4, 4.1.6 End of transmission 3.14, 3.17 Enter Coordinates 4.1.19 (P41) Establish station 4.3.2 (P20) Free station 4.3.23 (P20) Known station 4.3.6 (P20) Known station+ 4.3.12 (P20) External memory 2.6

J
Job file Part 1 Jump to beginning of file, Beg 4.2.4 to end of file, End 4.2.4

K
Kill, K 3.19 Known reference line (P24) 4.3.68

F
Field calculations 4.3.1

INDEX

L
Label types 4.1.4-6 (P40) Layer 4.3.169 (P39) Length table 4.3.174 (P39) Link program 4.1.6 (P40) Load, L 3.20 Long press 4.2

M
MCF (Moving Coordinates Forward) 4.3.228 Measure angle 4.3.48 (P22) Measure Coordinates 4.3.335 (P30) Measure obstructed point (P28) 4.3.100 Measure with refline 4.3.73 (P24) Measuring mode, change 3.22 Memory check 3.21 clear 4.2.17 internal 2.3 structure 1.2 units 2.2-13 Mode, PG 3.22

Point list 4.3.32 (P20) Program 20-Station Establishment 4.3.2 21-Z/IZ 4.3.41 22-Angle Meas 4.3.48 23-SetOut 4.3.56 24-RefLine 4.3.65 25-AreaCalc 4.3.84 26-DistOb 4.3.91 27-MCF 4.3.228 28-Obstructed Point 4.3.100 29-RoadLine 4.3.107 30-Measure Coordinates 4.3.335 32-AngleMeas Plus 4.3.307 33-Robotic Lite 4.3.341 39-RoadLine3D 4.3.134 40-U.D.S 4.1.2 41-Define Label 4.1.17 43-Enter Coordinates 4.1.19 45-Pcode 4.1.23 51-Set Protocol 3.16 54-File transfer 3.7 60-Athletics 4.3.331 61-COGO 4.3.243 start 4.2 Protocol 3.14-17

N
New data 4.2.7 job file 1.3

R
Radial/right angle offset (P23) 4.3.63 (P24) 4.3.76 (P29) 4.3.127 (P39) 4.3.183, 4.3.189-190, 4.3.192, 4.3.200, 4.3.205 Read control/station unit (RR/RG) 3.25 Reference point (P39) 4.3.212 Refline (P24) 4.3.65 Replace data 4.2.7 Roadline (P29) 4.3.107 RoadLine3D (P39) 4.3.134 Robotic Lite (P33) 4.3.341 A

O
Obstructed Point (P28) 4.3.100 Output from memory 3.23 user defined table 4.3

P
Parabola 4.3.143 (P39) Parity settings 3.14-15 Pcode activate 4.1.25 (P45) Personal computer 3.4, 3.5

INDEX

S
Scale factor 4.3.38 (P20) Serial commands 3.18 communication 3.9 SetOut (P23) 4.3.56 Set out point data 4.3.57 (P23) Setting out (P23) with countdown to zero 4.3.61 with radial/right angle offset 4.3.63 Setting out (P24) with coordinates 4.3.80 with radial/right angle offset 4.3.76 Setting out (P29) with countdown to zero 4.3.124 with radial/right angle offset 4.3.127 Setting out (P39) with countdown to zero 4.3.188 with radial/right angle offset 4.3.192 Short press 4.2 Slopestake 4.3.200 Standard labels 4.1.3 (P40) Station coords. (P20) Station Data (P20) Station establishment free station 4.3.23 (P20) known station 4.3.6 (P20) known station+ 4.3.12 (P20) Status 3.29 Store road line (P29) 4.3.114 (P39) 4.3.136 Structure of memory 1.2 Syntax 3.10

T
Target unit 3.8 Transfer files 3.3.-8 Transition 4.3.109 (P29) Transmission 3.14 Trig,TG 3.27 Two-face measurement 4.3.48 (P22)

U
U.D.S (P40) 4.1.2 Unit capacity 2.3, 2.7 Unknown reference line 4.3.70

V
View 4.2.18 Volume 4.3.85 (P25)

W
Weight factor 4.3.40 (P20) Write, WG/WR 3.28

WELCOME

Welcome to Geodimeter Software & Datacommunication

This manual will describe the different softwares that can be installed in Geodimeter system 400, 500, 4000 and 600. It will also describe how the memory is built up, which memory units that are available and how to transfer data between them. Since Geodimeter System 400, 500, 4000 and 600 have the same flexible design it is possible to upgrade software, memory units and other accessories. The various softwares makes it possible to customize your Geodimeter system to your own way of working. The built in two-way serial communication enables you to connect external memory units and computers to the instrument.

About this manual

The contents of this manual are as follows:

Part 1 - Memory Structure

describes how the memory is built up and how data is stored.

Part 2 - Memory Units

describes the internal memory and the external memory, Geodat 500.

Part 3 - Data Communication

contains instructions on how to transfer files between e.g. Geodimeter and Geodat. This part also describes the different serial commands that are available.

WELCOME

Part 4 - Software
includes the available softwares and contains step by step instructions on how to use each software. The softwares are divided into three main groups; Data Collecting, Edit & View and Field Calculations.

If you or your colleagues have any comments on this manual, we would be grateful to hear from you. Please write to: Spectra Precision AB Info & Market Communication dept. Box 64 SE-182 11 DANDERYD SWEDEN or send an e-mail to: info@geotronics.se

Memory Structure

MEMORY STRUCTURE PART 1

INTRODUCTION

Introduction
All Geodimeter memory devices have the same memory structure. This part will describe how the memory is structured and what happens when data is stored in and collected from the memory.

1.1

MEMORY STRUCTURE PART 1

Memory Structure
The memory structure of all Geodimeter memory units makes it is easy to check and identify the stored data after registration. The memory is divided in two separate files which are called Job- and Area-file. Both these files are fully flexible according to number and size. The only limit is the total storing capacity available in the memory. The memory can be used to store two types of data: survey measurements (Job-files) and known coordinates (Area-files). These Job- and Area-files consist of separate expansive memories which means that they can be updated individually at any time without affecting other Job- and Area-files. The total number of files is limited only to the total capacity of the memory. The more raw data stored in Job-files, the less known coordinate and elevation data that can be stored in Area-files and vice versa.

PCOD IH SH . . .

A R E A
1.2

.7654 N=200 .0922 E=192 .487 ELE=3 . . .

J O B

MEMORY STRUCTURE PART 1

Job files
In order to permit later identification of Job files, they are given a numeric, alpha or alphanumeric title by the user. All survey data are stored in a Job file. Even field calculated coordinate and elevation data are stored in these files. When complete, these files can be transferred separately to a computer while the unfinished files can remain in Geodat/Geodimeter Internal Memory. New Job file When you run most of the field calculation programs to F Geodimeter the program asks you to name the Job file in which you wish to store the measxurement data. Job no=0 50 does already exist. If you wish to create a new Jobfileoutside Label 50 the field programs you enter label 50 (F50) and key in the Job No new Job number. STD P0 14:32 The next time you registrate a measurement the data will Job no=0_ be stored in this Job file.

Area files
Known coordinates and elevations can be stored by manual keying in (P43), or by transfer from computer. Area-files, which are used during setting out survey, can be accessed by giving the name/number of the file in which the set out data is stored. By doing this, the search for the point is limited to just that particular file. Several different Area files can be prepared in advance of the survey job e.g. surveyors often know that they will be working in more than one single area during the course of a week. All known data for particular sites can therefore be stored in different Area files. This is especially advantageous if several points have the same numbers. Area no=0 does already exist.

Edit file
Any Area- or Job-file can be edited with the program Edit. With this program you can view and change the contents of the file after registration.
1.3

MEMORY STRUCTURE PART 1

AREA No 2 3 JOB No 2 AB 8 Free memory space

This is how the memory is structured. The more data that is stored in the Area file the more the Job file will be "pushed down in the memory" and the more the free memory space will decrease. In the above example the three files 2, AB and 8 represent different survey jobs. It is possible to continue in an existing Job file. If you return to the survey site to update the job 2 the new data will be appended on the old file and the files AB and 8 will be "pushed a little further down". File transfer When you transfer a Job file or an Area file the files are not erased from the device in which they were originally stored. They are infact copies of the data files which are transferred to the other device.

1.4

MEMORY STRUCTURE PART 1

When using Program 54 (See Part 3, Data communication) it is sometimes faster to transfer a Job file than an Area file. That is because when transferring an Area file all data in the Job file of the target unit must be pushed down first in order to create room for the new Area file.

New Area File AREA No JOB No JOB No Free memory space Before Free memory space After AREA No

The possibility also exists for deleting Job and Area files from a computer or a total-station. This would be done e.g. to create more room in the Geodimeter Memory Device, see Part 3, Data communication. The operation should be carried out only after a successfull transfer to a computer or another device.

1.5

Memory Units

MEMORY UNITS PART 2

INTRODUCTION

Introduction
Geodimeter totalstations includes an internal memory for data storage. When there is a need of more memory capacity, Geodimeter offers an external memory unit, Geodat 500. This unit can be connected to the instrument during the survey work and/or when finished the measuring operations. The external memory unit enables you to transfer data to e.g. a computer without having to bring your instrument with you. This part of the manual will describe the internal memory and the external memory unit Geodat 500.
Note!  Backup your memory

Note! As a safety measure always backup your memory to protect yourself from memory loss. It is easily done with Program 54 which enables you to transfer Job- and Area-files between the different Geodimeter units. See Part 3, Datacommunication for more information.

2.1

MEMORY UNITS PART 2

INTERNAL MEMORY

Part 2 Memory Units

Internal Memory
Unit description Unit capacity Program 54 Edit Setting up the Internal Memory as an active device 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.8 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12

Geodat 500
Unit description Unit capacity Transfer Parameters Memory structure Program 54 Info messages Data communication Connecting Geodat with other devices Setting up Geodat as an active memory device

2.2

MEMORY UNITS PART 2

INTERNAL MEMORY

Unit description
Geodimeter Total Stations are equipped with an internal memory for the storage of raw data, point information and calculated coordinate data. The memory volume is completely self supportive and can be used separately without the need of having other external memory devices connected. The total memory capacity can be enhanced by connecting a external memory device such as Geodat 500.

Unit capacity
The internal memory of Geodimeter has a capacity of appr. 32Kb or 900-10.000 points if storing of only Pno, HA, VA and SD. Data can be stored in an unlimited number of files. All Field Data=survey point information plus angles, distances and calculated coordinates, are stored in a Job File and all Known Data=survey site control point and traverse point coordinates and elevations are stored in an Area File as described in part 1, Memory Structure.

System

2.3

MEMORY UNITS PART 2

INTERNAL MEMORY

Program 54 - File Transfer

Program No 54 is included with Internal Memory. This program is designed for transferring Job-, Area- and U.D.Sfiles between different units. Internal transfer is also possible within each unit. See part 3, Data communication for more information about data transfer and program 54.

Edit
With the program Edit installed in the Geodimeter it is possible to view and change data that has been collected and stored in the internal memory. Edit is described in part 4, Software.

Setting up the Internal memory as an active memory device

When you are using most of the programs to your Geodimeter you will be prompted to select an active memory device in which you can registrate your measurements. If you wish to setup the internal memory as an active memory device outside any program the following steps must be taken.

STD P0 14:32 HA: 114.0480 VA: 105.2660

First step to the main menu by pressing the MNU key.

MNU

Menu 14.32 1. Set 2. Editor 3. Coord

4

In order to choose 4 Data comm. Press 4.

See next page 2.4

MEMORY UNITS PART 2

INTERNAL MEMORY

From previous page

Data com 14:32 1. Sel. device 2. Create table

Choose option 1 Select device.

Menu 14:33 1. Geodat 2. Serial 3. Xmem

4

Choose 4 Imem (Internal memory)

Imem Imem ON?

14.33

Press YES to continue or No to interrupt.

YES

Imem Table no=

ENT

14.33

Select output table number (0-5 depending on instrument) and then press ENT.

Imem REG key?

14.33

Control of the output can be done by pressing the REG key of the instrument (REG key?) or continous (Slave?). Choose REG by answering YES or press NO to be able to choose Slave. 2.5

MEMORY UNITS PART 2

GEODAT 500

Unit cording Data Re t 500 300 a Geod No. 571 200001 Part No. 50010 e in Sweden Ser. nics AB Mad
Geotro

ON

2.6

MEMORY UNITS PART 2

GEODAT 500

Geodat 500 - Unit description

Geodat 500 is a new member in our family of data recorders. It is designed for use with Geodimeter Total-Stations (except the series 100) and Control units for both storage and transfer of raw and calculated survey data either in the field or in the office. Data port

ON

ON/OFF key

Unit Capacity
Geodat 500 has a storage capacity of approximately 64Kb or 3000 survey points or 4500 points if storing only Pno, HA, VA and SD. Geodat 500 contains an internal battery for data-hold= approximately 2 years without the need to recharge. After that you should leave the instrument to authorized service where the internal battery is replaced.

Transfer Parameters
The protocol can be changed in order to suit the computer used for data transfer while the format is fixed. The protocol can be set up directly from the keyboard of Geodimeter using the program P51, (Set Protocol) or transferred from a computer. Program 51 are now contained in the software within the instrument.
2.7

MEMORY UNITS PART 2

GEODAT 500

Memory Structure
The memory can be used to store two types of data: survey measurements (Job-files) and known coordinates (Area-files). These Job- and Area-files consist of separate expansive submemories which means that they can be updated individually at any time without affecting other Job- and Area-files. The total number of files is limited only to the total capacity of the memory. The more raw data stored in Job-files, the less known coordinate and elevation data that can be stored in Area-files and vice versa.

Program 54 - File transfer

Program No 54 is included with Internal Memory. This program is designed mainly for the transfer of Job-, Areaand U.D.S.-files between different units, e.g. Geodat or personal computer. Transfer is also possible within each unit. See more about program 54 in part 3, Data communication.

2.8

MEMORY UNITS PART 2

GEODAT 500

Info messages
No 20 21 22 Message Illegal label number Parity error No or wrong device is connected 22.3 means Xmem error Time out normally seen after attempt to transfer data from device Backup battery to old Syntax error Not found (Files, points and/or programs) Wrong data-record separator Data error (Label not containing any value or text, i.e 5= ) Memory device is full Protocol error Overrun error Incompatible device (e.g. when trying P50) System error - contact your nearest Geodimeter service shop !

23

26 30 32 34 35

36 37 39 45 50

2.9

MEMORY UNITS PART 2

GEODAT 500

Data Communication
Computer as controller When using RS 232C, the command shall be sent as a normal ASCII string ending with the ETX sequence. In this case Protocol is always assumed to be 0. Geo / L Syntax Construction O = Output data from memory L = Load data into memory K = Erase memory M = Available memory File Types M = Job file I = Area file D = Protocol Commands Output / Input / Kill + File Type = Job No / Area No Examples OM=1 Output of Job No 1 from Geodat to computer Load data into Area 2 from computer to Geodat Erase Job No SITE2 from Job file Output of all catalogues from Geodat to computer Reinitializes the Geodat after System error (Error 50), erases all memory

LI=2

KM=SITE2 O*C

K*

For more information see part 3, Data Communication!

2.10

MEMORY UNITS PART 2

GEODAT 500

Connecting Geodat with other devices

1
ng Unit Data Recordi 500 300 Geodat 571 200 1 Part No. 5001000in Sweden Ser. No. AB Made
Geotronics

5
ON

6 7 4

DEVICES 1. Geodat 500 2. Station Unit 3. Control unit 4. Computer 5. External Battery

CABLES 6. Cable (571 136 754) 7. Cable (571 136 752) 8. Cable with charger: 115V (571 181 354) 220V (571 181 352 9. Cable with charger: 115V (571 136 876) 220V (571 136 874)

2.11

MEMORY UNITS PART 2

GEODAT 500

Setting up Geodat as an active memory device

When using most of the programs to your Geodimeter you will be prompted to choose in which memory device you wish to registrate your measurements. If you wish to setup the memory of Geodat outside any program the following steps must be taken. Connect the Geodimeter to the Geodat and place Geodimeter in the Theodolite Mode by going through the start procedure, P0.

STD P0 14:32 HA: 114.0480 VA: 105.2660

You begin with calling upon the main menu. Press MNU

MNU

Menu 14:32 1. Set 2. Editor 3. Coord

4

In order to choose 4 Data comm. Press 4.

Data com 14:32 1. Sel. device 2. Create table

Choose option 1 Select device. Press 1.

See next page 2.12

MEMORY UNITS PART 2

GEODAT 500

From previous page

Menu 14.32 1. Geodat 2. Serial 3. Xmem

3

Choose option 3 Xmem. Press 3. If you wish to record into the Internal Memory of Geodimeter press 4. Imem.

Xmem Xmem on?

14:32
Press YES to select or NO to interrupt.

YES

Xmem Table no=

14:33

Select output table number 0-5 (depending on instrument) and then press ENT.

ENT

Xmem REG key?

14:33

Control of the output can be done by pressing the REG key of the instrument (REG key?) or continous (Slave?). Choose REG by pressing YES or press NO to be able to choose Slave.

2.13

Data Communication

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

INTRODUCTION

Introduction
Geodimeter totalstations can be connected to external devices such as Geodat as described in part 2, Memory units. There is also possible to connect a computer to the instrument or connect e.g. the control unit with the station unit and transfer data between the different units. The data can thereafter be edited or used e.g. in a CAD-program. This part of the manual will describe how to connect the different units and how to transfer data between them.

3.1

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

Part 3 Data Communication

Data Transfer
How to connect the different Geodimeter devices Station unit - Geodat Control unit - Geodat Control unit - Personal Computer Station unit - Personal Computer Control unit - Station unit Personal Computer - Geodat Program 54 - File transfer 3.3 3.3 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.6 3.9 3.10 3.12 3.14 3.15 3.18 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 3.23 3.24 3.26 3.27 3.28 3.29

Serial Communication
Description of the command instructions Geodimeter Language syntax structure Protocol Program 51 - Set protocol Serial commands Directory Kill Load Memory Mode Output Position Read Trig Write Status description

3.2

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

How to connect the different Geodimeter devices

12

4 3
ng Unit Data Recordi 500 300 Geodat 571 200 Part No. 50010001 Sweden in Ser. No.
Geotronics AB Made

11
ON

8 6 7 6 7
AC/D C ADA 32 PTER Input: - 1032 220 Output: V~/50H 7
Type:FW 8V/12 z 3099 0mA

AC/D C ADA 32 PTER Input: - 1032 220 Output: V~/50H 7

Type:FW 8V/12 z 3099 0mA

9 10
AC/D C ADA 32 PTER Input: - 1032 220 Output: V~/50H 7
Type:FW 8V/12 z 3099 0mA

No

Cable (Part no)

Adapter Cable (571 125 140) Battery Cable (571 136 750) Cable Geodimeter-Geodat (571 135 752) Cable Geodimeter-Battery-Geodat (571 136 754) Cable Geodimeter-Battery Computer (571 126 756) Cable Geodat/Control Unit-Computer with charger 115V (571 136 876) Cable Geodat/Control Unit-Computer with charger 220V (571 136 874) Cable Geodimeter-Control Unit (571 181 350) Cable Geodat-Control Unit with charger 220V (571 181 352) Cable Geodat-Control Unit with charger 115V (571 181 354) Cable Geodat-Battery-Control Unit (571 181 356) Cable Geodimeter-Battery-Radio (571 181 068)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

3.3

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

DATA TRANSFER

Data Transfer
Any Geodimeter total station can be connected to an external device via a built in serial interface. This part of the manual will describe how to transfer data from and to the Geodimeter instrument.

Station unit

Geodat

Connect the Station unit and the Geodat to a battery via the cable 571 136 752/754. Turn on both instruments and enter program 54 at the Station unit. Choose (From Xmem, To Imem) if data are to be transferred from the Geodat to the Station unit or choose (From Imem, To Xmem ) if data are to be transferred in the other direction. See more about program 54 on page 3.6.

Control unit

Geodat

Connect the Control unit and the Geodat to a charger via the cable 571 181 352 (220V), 354 (115V). Instead of a charger you can connect a battery via the cable 571 136 754. Turn on both units and follow the Station-Geodat instructions above for file transfer between the two units. Note!  Note ! To be able to transfer data from or to the RPUs internal memory the Control unit has to be detached from the RPU.

Control unit

Personal Computer

Connect the Control unit and the computer to a charger via the cable 571 136 874/876. Instead of a charger you can connect a battery via the cable 571 136 754 and turn on both units. There are two ways to transfer data between these units: 1. with Program 54 Enter program 54 at the control unit and choose (From imem, To serial) to transfer files from the control unit to the computer or choose (From serial, To imem) to transfer files
3.4

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

DATA TRANSFER

in the other direction. In the second case the transfer is initiated by copying the file from the computer to the communication port. See more about program 54 on page 3.6. 2. with RS-232 commands By sending the appropriate commands from the computer you can transfer data between the control unit and computer. Look at page 3.9 for more information about serial communication.

Station unit

Personal Computer

Connect the Station unit and the computer to a battery via the cable 571 136 756 and turn on both units. Then follow the Control unit-Personal Computer instructions above for file transfer between the two units.

Control unit

Station unit

Connect the Station unit and the Control unit to a battery via the cable 571 181 350. Turn on both units and enter program 54. First choose (From Serial, To Imem) at the unit that are to receive data then choose (From Imem, To Serial) at the unit that are to send data. See more information about program 54 at page 3.6.

Personal Computer

Geodat

Connect the Geodat and the Personal Computer to a charger via the cable 571 126 874/876. By sending the appropriate commands from the computer you can transfer data between the two units. Look at page 3.9 for more information about serial communication.

3.5

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

PROGRAM 54 - FILE TRANSFER

PRG 54

Program 54 - File transfer

Connect the two units with the appropriate cable and switch them on. The instructions below describes how to transfer files from the Control unit to the Station units internal memory: Operation at the source unit
P54

Choose program 54

From 16:12 2. Imem 3. Serial

Choose from which device you want to transfer files. In this example we choose 2 Imem.

File 16:12 1. Job 2. Area 3. U.D.S

1

Here you can choose what type of file you want to transfer: 1. A jobfile 2. A areafile or 3 A U.D.S-file. In this example we choose 1. A jobfile.

16:12 Job=

Key in the name of the file. In this example we key in Job=1

See next page

3.6

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

PRG

PROGRAM 54 - FILE TRANSFER

From previous page

54

To 16:54 2. Imem 3. Serial

To which device are you going to send the chosen file/s from the source unit. Here we choose 3. serial.

P54 16:54 COM=1.8.0.9600

Note! 
ENT

Enter new serial parameters or accept the current. Here we accept the current with enter. Note ! Prepare the target unit before accepting the serial parameters for a successfull file transfer. The file/s are sent via the cable and the display shows "Wait" during the transfer and you will then exit program 54.

P54 16:54 Wait

See next page

Note! 

Note - Info 19 If info 19 appears during a file transfer that means that the file transfer was not successfull. In that case you should run the file transfer again and look for where it fails, that is when info 35 (Data error) will show. Then check your file for any errors and if possible correct them with the editor.

3.7

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

PROGRAM 54 - FILE TRANSFER

Operation at the target unit

PRG 54

P54

Choose program 54

From 16:12 2. Imem 3. Serial

From which device are you going to send files to the target unit. In this case it is 3. Serial.

P54 16:54 COM=1.8.0.9600

Enter the serial parameters which must be same as the serial parameters at the source unit. In this example we accept the current with ENT.

ENT

To 16:54 1. Job 2. Area 3. U.D.S

3

What type of file should the transferred files be saved as: 1. Job, 2. Area or 3. U.D.S. In this example we choose 1. Job since we are transferring a Jobfile.

To Wait

16:54

The unit is now ready to receive. Start the transfer from the source unit.

3.8

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMUNICATION

Serial Communication
This part of the manual describes the communication language that is used when the Geodimeter, Control Unit or Geodat is communicating with a personal computer. In order to meet Geotronics new standard for data transfer., the protocol parameters must be set as described at page 3.14, if you want to use Geodimeter Surveying Tool (GST) which is a software package for data transfer, pre-processing and data management. The suggested protocols are also recommended for users who makes their own programs.

3.9

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMUNICATION

Description of the command instructions

This part of the manual describes the syntax for communication via the RS232 serial communication port in Geodimeter System 400/4000/500/600. Not all commands apply to all devices, information about this is given in the command description. Some of the commands are new and other have additions which will not apply to older versions of the software in the devices.

Bold characters, O, must be written as given. Text within hooks, <..>, is to be replaced with appropriate characters. Items within square brackets, [..], is optional and need not to be entered. Text within brackets, (..), is an ASCII control character, e.g. (CR) is equal to ASCII 13 Carriage Return). The hooks and the brackets shall not be written. All commands must be ended with a carriage return, the line feed is not necessary. Syntax for End of Command is: (CR) [(LF)]. In the following text this End of Command sequence is omitted. The instructions contains the following information: Purpose: Syntax: Description of what the command does. <The syntax> {devices for which the com mand is valid}

Comments: Description of arguments etc.

3.10

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMUNICATION

Return:

Description of what is returned from the receiver of the command. <status> is equal to the messages given in the info list. Status is not always returned. However the prompt <eot> is always returned. Special information. Some typical examples.

Details: Examples:

Abbreviations <lbl> <dta> <cmd> <dev> <arg> Label, the tag which identifies the data Data, the data itself One character command One character device, which can be a directory in the memory or device. One or more arguments, all arguments are one character long. If two arguments are given which are contrary to each other the last one is taken. <dev> Name of the file to be up- or down-loaded. End of text. Used to separate data posts from each other. When transfer from Stn, <etx>=(CRLF). When input to Stn, <etx>= (CR) or (CRLF). End of transmission. Tells the receiver that transfer is completed. Message. Tells if an error condition occurs, or gives the status of requested system parameter. Separates arguments from label. Separates label from data. Carriage return terminates the command. Line feed.

<dir> <file> <etx>

<eot> <status>

, = (CR) (LF)

3.11

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMUNICATION

Devices Stn CU Gdt Arguments 'I' 'M' 'U' '*' 'D' The Area directory The Job directory The U.D.S program directory All directories Protocol directory (Geodat) Station unit Control unit Geodat

Geodimeter Language (Geo/L) syntax structure

The Geodimeter language is developed in order to create a standard for communication between devices in Geodimeter Systems. The basic Geodimeter data structure is data tagged with a label. <lbl>=<dta> e.g. 7=254.3496 Horizontal angle 254.3496

From this is the language developed by addition of commands and arguments in order to be able to direct data to and from a destination. <cmd><dev><arg>...,<lbl>=<dta>(CR)[(LF)] e.g. WG, 67=24572.358 Setout coordinate North set to 24572.358

3.12

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMUNICATION

Command types There are two types of commands, one that requests data from the device, and on that sends data to set the device. Common for both types is that <eot> always is sent when the command is executed and the system is ready for a new command. Sender: Receiver: <complete command>(CR) [<status><etx>] [<lbl>=<dta><etx>]... <eot>

The status consists of 1 to 3 digits and is recognized in that no equal sign (=) is found before <etx>. A request type command always gives a response with status and/or data posts. While a set type command only responses with status when an error condition occurs. The meaning of the status number is equal to the normal messages given in the info list. When file are transferred: Sender: <cmd><dir>=<file>(CR)[(LF)] <lbl>=<dta><etx> <lbl>=<dta><etx> <eot>

Sender or receiver:

Commands when starting up the communication Break <alt><b> to start the Geodimeter PV,20 to start compenstor calibration PV,21 to switch off the Geodimeter Return signals from the Geodimeter @ the compensator is displayed ! Geodimeter awaits answer, Y(es) or N(o).
3.13

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMUNICATION

Protocol
Standard protocol for Station unit, Control unit and Geodat Station unit Control unit Geodat From program 582-04 From program 588-01 From program 594-01 Set 9600 0 8 1 62 Meaning None 8 bits 1 bit 10 sec Always on (Geodat) DC1 (17) DC2 (19) >

Baud rate Parity Character length Stop bits Time out:

(F78): (F78): (F78): (F78):

Software flow control: Xon character: Xoff character: End of transmission (F79):

See next page for more information about how to set protocol.

3.14

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

PROGRAM 51 - SET PROTOCOL

PRG 51

Program 51 - Set Protocol

P51

Choose program 51.

Sel device 10:28 1 Xmem Select the device for which you want
to change the protocol.

P51 10:28 Set protocol 0 1:Baud=9600_

Here you enter the baudrate (5019200). Standard baudrates are e.g. 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200. Press ENT.

ENT

P51 10:28 Set protocol 0 2:Parity=0_

Enter the parity. No parity=0 Odd parity=1 Even parity=2 Press ENT.

ENT

P51 10:28 Set protocol 0 3:Char. len=8_

Enter the character length (7 or 8) and press ENT.

ENT

See next page 3.15

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

PROGRAM 51 - SET PROTOCOL

From previous page

PRG 51

P51 10:28 Set protocol 0 4:Stop bits=1_

Enter the number of stop bits and press ENT.

ENT

P51 10:28 Set protocol 0 5:Time out=10_

ENT

Enter time out in seconds and press ENT. Time out is a parameter that determines the time after which a serial operation is interrupted if the transfer have been halted or if no device is found when trying to transfer. E.g. if trying to transfer data between a personal computer and a Geodat and the Geodat is not turned on the operation will be interrupted after the number of seconds that the time out parameter is set to. Switch hardware handshake on=1 or off=0. When the parameter is activated the transmitting instrument will check that the receiving instrument is ready for transfer before it starts to send and during a transfer.

P51 10:28 Set protocol 0 6:Hardw. Hs=0_

ENT

P51 10:28 Set protocol 0 4:Softw. Hs=1_

ENT

Switch software handshake on=1 or off=0. If the receiving instrument is receiving to much data at a time and the parameter is activated, the transfer is paused until the already send data has been handled, the transfer will then continue.

See next page 3.16

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

PROGRAM 51 - SET PROTOCOL

From previous page

PRG 51

P51 10:28 Set protocol 0 16:EOT=1.62

Enter end of transmission. That is the sign which is sent when the transfer is ready. The value is ASCII (62=>).

ENT

P51 10:28 Ready ?

Press YES or ENT to step to program 0 or press NO to reenter the protocol parameters. In this case we press ENT.

ENT

P0

10:28
You return to program 0, P0.

Temp=20.0_

3.17

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMANDS

Directory
Purpose: Syntax: Comments: <dir> List of file catalog in memory. O<dir>C {Stn, Gdt, CU}

Is the dir argument. 'I', 'M', 'U' and '*' are used. If <dir> is set to '*' the file catalog for all directories is output. <lbl>=<file><etx> <lbl>=<dta><etx> <eot> <status><etx> <eot>

Return:

or

Examples: OMC File catalog of all Job files in the JOBdirectory. O*C File catalog of all files in the memory.

3.18

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMANDS

Kill
Purpose: Syntax: Comments: <dir> Delete files in memory. K<dir>[=<file>] {Stn, Gdt, CU}

Valid directories for all devices are M, I and U. For Geodat is also D valid. If the file is omitted all files in the directory will be deleted. If the directory is given a wildcard * the entire memory will be deleted.

<file> The file entry is the name of the specific file to be deleted. Return: or <eot> <status><etx> <eot> Examples: K* KI

Delete entire memory. Delete all area files.

KM=LOT Delete JOB named LOT.

3.19

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMANDS

Load
Purpose: Load Memory. Data according to the standard format can be loaded into the memory device. L<dir>=<file> L<dir><prot>=<file> LD {Stn, Gdt, CU} {Stn, CU} {Gdt}

Syntax:

Comments: <dir>

Is the dir argument. 'I', 'M', and 'U' are used.

<file> Is the name of the file (max 15 characters). The file name is case sensitive. <prot> Is the protocol number. Return: <*> or <status><eot> If an error occurs. Details: The transmission can start after the command is sent and the prompt <*> is send back from the device. The data shall be in the Geodimeter standard format. The transmission is ended by the EOT character. The EOT is given in F79 for Geodimeter and CU, and as protocol parameter 16 in Geodat. Examples: LI=LOT6 The area file LOT6 is created and can be loaded when the prompt * is received from the device. LU=15 U.D.S program 15 will be loaded into GDM or CU. LD Loads the protocol file into Geodat.

When this is received transmission of data can start.

3.20

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMANDS

Memory
Purpose: Syntax: Check for free memory. M[G] M[R] {Stn, Gdt} {CU}

Return: or

<number of bytes left><etx> <eot> <status><etx> <eot>

Examples: Command M MG

Return 31654 31654 Bytes left in memory

3.21

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMANDS

Mode
Purpose: Syntax: Change measuring mode. PG,3=<arg> {Stn}

Comments: <arg> 0 1 2 3 4 Return:

STD-mode TRK-mode D-bar mode FSTD-mode D-bar mode, high resolution

<eot> or <status><etx> <eot> Details: The command will work whether the instrument is locked on a target or not.

Examples: PG,3=0 PG,3=1 PG,3=2 PG,3=3 PG,3=4

Change to STD-mode Change to TRK-mode Change to D-bar mode Change to FSTD-mode Change to D-bar mode, high resolution

3.22

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMANDS

Output
Purpose: Syntax: Output from memory. O<dir>=<file> O<dir><arg> O<dir><prot>=<file> OD {Stn, Gdt, CU} {Stn, Gdt, CU} {Stn, CU} {Gdt}

Comments: <dir> Is the dir argument. 'I', 'M', and 'U' are used. <file> Is the name of the file (max 15 characters). The file name is case sensitive. <prot> Is the protocol number. <arg> Is the argument field. One argument can be used, 'C'. The 'C' argument will give an output of the file catalog. Return: <lbl>=<dta><etx> <lbl>=<dta><etx> <eot> <status><etx> <eot> Examples: OM=A45 Job file A45 is send out. OU=3 U.D.S program no 3 is output.

or

3.23

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMANDS

Position
Purpose: Syntax: Position the Station unit with servo. WS=<servo command> {Stn}

Comments: <servo command> The servo command is divided in the following parts: <cmd><ang><tol>[<ang><tol>] <cmd> P Tells Geodimeter to perform a position task, to given angles in horizontal and/or vertical. The angles can be given either via the instrument keyboard or by the serial command Write (WG). Enter the labels 26 and 27 with the correct values and then use the WS command to perform the positioning.

<ang> H Horizontal positioning V <tol> Vertical positioning

nn Positioning tolerance, given in cc (0-99). Tolerance=0 means no tolerance given, typical accuracy is 2cc if set to 0. <eot> <status><etx> <eot>

Return: or

Examples: WS=PH05V10 WS=PH01 WS=PV15

Position horizontal with 5cc accuracy and vertical with 10cc accuracy. Position horizontal with 1cc accuracy. Position vertical with 15cc accuracy.
3.24

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMANDS

Read
Purpose: Read Station unit or Control unit. Read of measured data or data in specific labels. RG=[<arg>][,<lbl>] RR=[<arg>][,<lbl>] {Stn} {CU}

Syntax:

Comments: <arg> [S] N D V T <lbl>

Standard output Name output Data output Numeric output item by item Test if signal from target. 300 is returned if NO signal. 301 is returned if signal. If a label is given, the contents of that label is returned. When omitted measured data is returned. Standard output

Return:

<status><etx> <lbl>=<dta><etx> e.t.c.... <eot>

or <status><etx> Name output <lbl name>=<dta><etx> e.t.c.... <eot> or <status><etx> <dta><etx> e.t.c.... <eot> or <status><etx> <lbl><etx> <dta><etx> e.t.c.... <eot>
3.25

Data output

Numeric output

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMANDS

or <status><etx> <eot> or <lbl><dta> <eot> or <lbl name><dta><etx> <eot> or <dta><etx> <eot> or <lbl><etx> <dta><etx> <eot> Specific label numeric Specific label only data Specific label with name Specific label Message or Meas signal test

Details: When read of measure data, the output is dependent on how the output table in the Geodimeter is set. See Geodimeter User Manual for detailed information. Examples: Command RG

Return 0 7=10.2345 8=101.1005 9=145.324 0 10.2345 101.1005 145.324 301 5=104

Command RGN,5 RGN

Return Pno=104 0 HA=10.2345 VA=101.1005 SD=145.324 0 7 10.2345 8 101.1005 9 145.324

RGD

RGV

RGT RG,5

3.26

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMANDS

Trig
Purpose: Syntax: Start of distance measurement in Station unit TG[<arg>] {Stn}

Comments: <arg> Is the argument for short range '<' or long range '>' measure. The '<' is default and need not to be entered. Return: or <eot> <status><etx> <eot> Examples: TG or TG< TG>

Start of short range measure Start of long range measure

3.27

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

SERIAL COMMANDS

Write
Purpose: Write data into the Station unit or Control unit. All labels that can be set by the function key in the system can be written. WG,<label>=<data> WR,<label>=<data> {Stn} {CU}

Syntax:

Comments: <label> 0-99 <data> Maximum 9 digits for numeric type labels, and maximum 16 characters for ASCII type labels. Return: or <eot> <status><etx> <eot> Examples: WG,5=10 Label 5 set to 10 in Station unit.

3.28

DATA COMMUNICATION PART 3

STATUS DESCRIPTION

Status description
Value 0 3 Description Instrument operating correctly, all required data are available. The measured distance has already been recorded. A new distance measurement is required. Measurement is invalid and recording not possible. Recording is not possible with the selected mode setting of the Geodimeter instrument. No device connected Label error. This label cannot be handled by the instrument. Parity error in transferred data (between Geodimeter and interface). Bad or no connection, or wrong device connected. Time Out Illegal state to execute command. Occurs when trying to communicate in C2-position. Syntax error. Data error.

4 5 10 20 21 22 23 24 30 35

3.29

Software

SOFTWARE PART 4

INTRODUCTION

Introduction
Geodimeter totalstations can be equipped with a number of different softwares in order to make the surveying work more efficient. This part of the manual will describe the different softwares that are available, how they are operated and what you can achieve by using them.

Choose program
Both the numeric- and the alphanumeric keyboard are equipped with a program key, hereafter referred to as the PRG-key.
PRG

Program key

By pressing this key you can start any program that are installed in your instrument. There are two ways to choose a program; short press and long press on the PRG-key. On the next side we will describe the two different methods.

4.1

SOFTWARE PART 4

INTRODUCTION

Short press With a short press on the PRG-key you will get the following display appearance:

STD

P0

10:16

Program=20

Key in the desired program number and press enter to confirm the choice, e.g. 20 ENT will enter program number 20, Station Establishment.

Long press With a long press on the PRG-key you step to the program menu. Here you can display all the available programs. Any program that are available but not installed in your instrument is displayed with two brackets,( ).

PRG P20 10:16 460 582-09 Stn establ. Dir <-- --> Exit

<-- Current library and program no <-- Instrument model and program ver <-- Current program name <-- Key functions

Key functions: Dir: Step between the U.D.S- and PRG-library <-- --> Step backward / forward in the chosen library. Exit/MNU: Exit without starting any program ENT: Start the chosen program
Note ! 

Note - arrowkeys If the arrowkey is held depressed you will automatically step to the next/previous program without having to press the key repeatedly.

4.2

SOFTWARE PART 4

INTRODUCTION

User defined storage of control data in the field calculation programs

It is possible to define what results to be stored in the JOB file using the field calculation programs. In some programs you can only add information and in some you can define data all by yourself. See page 4.6 for a complete list of the programs that can be configured. When you start any of these programs by the program library you will get the following display appearance:

P23 14:17 1 Run 2 Config

<-- Current program no and time <-- Start program without any config. <-- Configure program

Choose 1 Run to start the program without any configuration or press 2 to configurate the program. Press the CL-key to exit from this menu and step to the current program. Configurate the user defined output table When you press 2 you will get the following display appearance:

P23 14:17 1 Exit Note!  2 View table When 3 Enter user tbl pressing

<-- Current program no and time <-- Step to the previous menu <-- View the current output table <-- Configure table

the PRGkey on the ENT control unit in local mode you See next page can only access this Choose one of the alternatives (press ENT for 1 or the CL-key to step to the previous menu. menu.

more) or press

4.3

SOFTWARE PART 4
From the previous page

INTRODUCTION

P23 14:17 4 Clear user tbl

<-- Clear the current user table

How to use
2 View table If you press 2 you will view the current output table:

P23 14:17 Def. tbl pos 1 Label : Pno more ?

<-- Current program no and time <-- Table position <-- Label <-- View more ?

This is position 1 in the output table. Press YES or ENT to view the next position or step to the previous menu with NO. When all positions in the output table are viewed you will return to the previous menu.

3 Enter user table If you press 3 you will enter the output table:

P23 14:17 User tbl pos 1 Label no=_

<-- Current program no and time <-- Table position <-- Label

This is position 1 in the output table. Enter the first label no and press ENT. Press only ENT when you are finished. The new output table will be default.

4.4

SOFTWARE PART 4

INTRODUCTION

4 Clear user table If you press 4 you will get the following display appearance:

P23 14:17 Clear user tbl Are you sure ?

Press YES or ENT to delete the current output table or press NO to cancel. Note ! When you delete the output table the standard output table will be default.

Which data can be stored in a specific program ? On the next page is a list over the labels that are always stored in a specific program (Always) and which labels that the operator can choose whether to include or not (Standard). E.g. in program P24, RefLine, the Reference point data (labels 5, 37, 38...) are always stored. The operator can by configu-rating the program via the configuration menu at startup choose whether to include any of the standard labels or not, e.g. measured point data (5, 6, 37...). As default when no configuration has been made, all standard will be stored.

4.5

SOFTWARE PART 4

INTRODUCTION

Program configuration list Always=cannot be changed SetOut - P23 Standard=can be changed Always: None Standard: 5, 40, 41, 42* RefLine - P24 (Measure) Always: (5, 37, 38, 39, 5, 37, 38, 39, 44) Standard: 5, 6*, 37, 38, 39*, 72, 73, 42* (SetOut with Radofs/RTofs) Always: (5, 37, 38, 39, 5, 37, 38, 39) Standard: 5, 72, 73, 42* (SetOut with coordinates) Always: (5, 37, 38, 39, 5, 37, 38, 39) Standard: Same as P23, modified by config P23. DistOb - P26 Always: 5, 5, 7, 11, 10, 14 Standard: None Obstructed Point - P28 Always: 20, distBC, Pno, 37, 38, 39, 7, 11, 10, 14 Standard: Data for point A and B RoadLine - P29 (SetOut) Always: None Standard: 80, 83, 40, 41, 42*, 39* (Measure) Always: None Standard: 80, 83, 4, 37, 38, 39*
* These labels (height) are only stored if height measurement has been included in the station establishment. These labels are only stored if using a known reference line.

4.6

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG 40

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

Chapter 1 Data Collecting

U.D.S - P40
Geodimeter Standard Labels Label Types How to use Examples 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.8 4.1.12 4.1.17 4.1.18 4.1.19 4.1.20 4.1.23 4.1.27

Define Label - P41

How to use

Enter Coordinates - P43

How to use

Pcode - P45
How to use

4.1.1

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

U.D.S - In general

U.D.S will allow the operator to create own User Definied Sequences for the registration and display of measurement, coding and administrative data. Creation of the sequences is 40 carried out directly from the keyboard of the instrument or In general transferred from an external device via the serial port.
40 PRG

What advantages can be gained with U.D.S

It is possible to create and store up to 20 U.D.Ss in the instrument. The existence and use of a buffer memory in the instrument allows data to be stacked, which leads to simplified and accelerated data registration. It is possible to create and store up to 16 user definied labels (No 84-99) in the instrument. Measurement status is always under complete operator control with the help of the automatic display of program prompts in the instrument. All labels and values can be duplicated, incremented or decremented automatically. This means that the labels can be registered in a Geodimeter Memory Device (GMD) without even seeing them in the display and without the need to press the ENT key for duplicating and incrementing/decrementing.

4.1.2

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

Program 40 - Program Generation

Program 40 must be selected in order to create an U.D.S. Once the sequence has been created it is not necessary to run 40 the program 40 in order to access the UDS. It is stored in the In general memory of the instrument and can be directly accessed by choosing the UDS program number. It will also remain within the instrument until it is deleted or changed by the operator. Program 0-19 are reserved for UDSs. The sequence is generated by specifying the program No, the order of the desired labels=program prompts and label types. Finally, the label No 79=End must be used to either terminate, loop or link the U.D.S to another U.D.S.

Creation of U.D.S's
On the next page is a list of Standard Labels. In addition, user definied labels can be set with Program 41 which is described on page 4.1.17. The list and table of label types is not sufficient to explain how and when certain labels and label types are displayed in the instrument during the creation of your U.D.S's. You simply key in the label's corresponding number and type in the desired order. In the event of making a mistake during the creation of the U.D.S, the opportunity of correcting the mistake is given by the program asking you to confirm the choice of both label and label type. Your choice of labels and label types is more easily understood when you start to create your own U.D.S's together with the help of the following examples.

Geodimeter Standard Labels

The label list containing Label 0-83 possess certain functions in Geodimeter operation. While creating U.D.S's, the operator can change the prompt text (P41) but the function of the label will remain the same. Labels 84-99 are reserved for arbitrary use by the user and can be definied with the program 41, Set Label. Due to the flexibility of the system, almost all label types can be used with all labels. In P0 the Note  only types valid are 2, 6, 7, 8. Info 41 is shown if a wrong Info 41 label type is used.
4.1.3

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG 40

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

Label types
The label type determines the function of the label. No Label Type Registration Description Collect values directly from the Geodimeter. Enter data manually. Set values directly in the Geodimeter. Display both prompt and the last registered value. Automatic in-/decrementation of the previously stored value. Return the U.D.S to the first program step.

Label types

1 2 N o 3

Prompting label Set * Label Typ Duplicating (auto. or man.) l Type In-/decrementing (auto. or man.) Loop/repeat END *

6 o 7

Single Program END * Return the U.D.S to P0. el Type Link Program END * Link the present U.D.S to another U.D.S. View label * Call U.D.S-program * View a value. Start another U.D.S inside the current U.D.S as a subroutine. Choose memory unit and Job file.

8 9

10

Logon *

* Can not be stored

4.1.4

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG 40

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

Label types Note  For label 21 the only label types that can be used are 1&2

0 - Registration Registration of raw and/or calculated values from the Geodimeter. This type of label is chosen when measured and calculated values can be collected directly from the Geodimeter, e.g. HA, VA, SD, N, E, ELE, HD, VD. 1 - Prompting label Enter data manually after the prompt. The default value of the label will not be displayed. 2 - Set These pre-set values e.g. Label 21=Hor.ref. angle can be set directly in the Geodimeter

3 - Duplicating (automatically or manually) This label type is used for displaying both the prompt and Note  the last registered value (e.g. SH=0.75). This value can be If the changed by overwriting or accepted by depressing ENT. same label The first time you key in the label when you run the U.D.S and you are able to choose if the duplication should be automatic type or not. If so the next time you enter this program step the exists in an UDS label is automatically stored without being displayed.
that are linked or called upon, the duplication, in-/decrementation remains.

4 - Incrementing/Decrementing (automatically or manually) The previously stored value belonging to the same label e.g. Pno=3 is automatically incremented/decremented and can be accepted and stored into GDM either manually or automatically. Displayed values can be overwritten and/or accepted. The first time you key in the label when you run the U.D.S you are able to choose if the incrementation/decrementation should be automatic or not. If so the next time you enter this program step the label is automatically incremented/ decremented and stored without being displayed. Note - when using Autodup or Autoincr/decr Sometimes you are able to change the "invisible" values during a U.D.S sequence by using the function key and enter a new value for the label, e.g. F6, ENT, SH=1.0, ENT.
4.1.5

Note 

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG 40

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

5 - Loop/repeat END Choice of this label type will automatically return the U.D.S to the first program step after registration of the last data items in the measurement sequence. 6 - Single Program END Choice of this label type will return the U.D.S to program 0 after registration of the last data items in the measurement sequence. 7 - Link Program END Choice of this label type will link the present U.D.S to another U.D.S of the operators choice, allowing the field operation to be registered as one complete sequence. Note that in the linked U.D.S the logon procedure will not be run. 8 - View Label This label type is used when you wish to look at certain values without changing them. Useful if you have Auto dup./ Auto inc. Note that the values will only show if you have a measured distance. Change any value with the function key.

Label types

9 - Call U.D.S If you choose this label type you are able to start another U.D.S program as a subroutine. When the subprogram is finished you return to the next step in the original U.D.S. You can call upon U.D.S's in max. 4 levels, otherwise you will get Info 47. Note that the linked U.D.S. must end with type 6 (Single program END). Note!  Note ! The labels that are unique in the subprogram will not be reset when you restart the original U.D.S program. 10 - Logon Choose in which unit and in which Job file you wish to store the data when you make a registration. This label type can only be accessed when starting the U.D.S from computer. In order to register anything a logon step must be run through otherwise Info 10 will appear when trying to register, link or call. 4.1.6

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

Is this how you would like to set up your own program ? PRG
40

Prog. No

Prompts used in U.D.S

Label No

Label Remarks Type Program generation of general project/Job data program YES Value seen, accept or key in new Value taken directly from GDM. -"Prompted for and keyed in -"Single program, return to P0 Program generation of inst.stn/Ref.Obj data program YES Prompted for and keyed in -"-"-"Link this program to Prog. 3.

1 2 3

Logon Operat Date Time Temp Press End

53 51 52 56 74 79

(10) 3 3 3 1 1 6

Logon Stn IH RefObj HA ref End

2 3 62 21 79

(10) 1 1 1 1 7

Program generation of survey point data program Pno Pcode SH HA VA SD END 5 4 6 7 8 9 79 4 3 3 0 0 0 5 Incr/decr value seen, accept or key in new. Duplicated value seen, accept or key in new -"Value taken directly from GDM -"-"Prog. loops back to first step in this sequence=Pno
4.1.7

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG 40

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

How to use

The programs (sequences) on the previous page are only examples of how you could design your field data recording sequences. Normally the surveyor is aware of the different types of projects in which he or she shall be involved and it is therefore possible to design in advance those programs which he or she may need and store them in Geodimeter. In the event of some unusual survey task turning up for which time is no stored program, it is a case of just entering the required sequence into Geodimeter directly in the field.

How to use

STD P0 10:16 HA=392.9095 VA=102.8955

Select program 40 (U.D.S).

PRG

40

ENT

P40 10:17 Prog.no=

1

You are now ready to begin with creation of the U.D.S's 1, 2 and 3 on the previous page. First key in 1 and ENT.

ENT

See next page

4.1.8

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

From previous page.

PRG 40

P26 10:17 P1 Name=_

How to use

Enter a name for the U.D.S -program. Press the ASCII-key to enter an alphanumerical name (max 16 characters). Press ENT when ready.
P26 10:17 Prog.no=1 View ?

Note 
ENT

Note ! If the program already exists this question appears. Press YES to view the program or NO and YES to delete it.

P40 10:16 Logon?

Press YES or ENT to put logon first in the program. (See page 4.1.14 for information about logon).

YES

P40 10:16 P1 Step no 1 Label no=_

Step 1 is Label No for operator. Key in 53 and ENT.

53

P40 10:16 P1 Step no 1 Label :Operat Type = _

3
ENT

Label type=duplication type (3) as it is often same operator who uses the instrument daily. Key in 3 and press ENT. If you leave the line blank you will return to the previous menu.

See next page. 4.1.9

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

From previous page.

PRG 40

How to use

P40 10:16 P1 Step no 1 Dup:Operat Ok?

YES

Here you have a chance to change your mind e.g. if you made a mistake with either label choice and/or label type. In this example we press YES.

P40 10:17 P1 Step no 2 Label no=_

Label no for Date. Key in 51 and ENT.

51

P40 10:17 P1 Step no 2 Label :Date Type = _

0
ENT

This value will be taken directly from GDM as you have chosen label type 0, you will not need to key in the date. Key in 0 and ENT.

P40 10:17 P1 Step no 2 Meas:Date Ok?

YES

Press YES to accept the label.

Carry on in this manner using the filled in example on page 4.1.7. If you loose track as to where you are in your sequence you can easily see this by checking on the step No.

See next page. 4.1.10

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

From previous page.

PRG 40

When you come to step No 6 which is the point at which you wish to terminate the sequence, do as follows:

How to use

P40 10:21 P1 Step no 6 Label no=_

This is equivalent to choosing Label No 79=END. Press only ENT.

ENT

P40 10:21 P1 Step no 6 Label :Special Type =

6

This is the label type for a single nonlinked sequence. Key in 6 and ENT.

P40 10:21 P1 Step no 6 Single Ok?

YES

Key in YES to accept the label.

STD P0 10:21 HA:32.9960 VA:48.9088

You are automatically returned to the program 0. In order to be able to continue with sequence creation it is necessary to choose Program 40 before starting with Program 2.

4.1.11

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

U.D.S Examples

The design of U.D.S's is of course dependent on how your existing software accepts data recorded in Geodimeter 40 Recording Devices. Formatting possibilities must exist within U.D.S the system so as to be able to present the recorded and examples transferred data in a suitable lay out. This may entail some small changes to existing data transfer programs or even the necessity to create some new ones. Recording of raw data Prog 1 - General Label 53 51 52 56 74 79 Text Logon Operat Date Time Temp Press END Type 10 3 3 3 1 1 6 Label 2 3 62 21 79 Prog 2 - Stn Est Text Logon Stn IH RefObj HAref END Type 10 1 1 1 1 7

Prog 3 - Survey with heights Label 5 4 6 7 8 9 79 Text Pno Pcode SH HA VA SD END Type 4 3 3 0 0 0 5

Prog 4 - Survey with no heights Label 5 4 7 8 9 79 Text Pno Pcode HA VA SD END Type 4 3 0 0 0 5

4.1.12

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG 40

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

Prog 5 - Survey Label 5 7 8 9 79 Text Pno HA VA SD END Type 4 0 0 0 5 Label 7 8 9 79

Prog 6 - Survey Text HA VA SD END Type 0 0 0 5

U.D.S examples

Recording of raw data and coordinates Prog 8 - Survey with heights Label 4 5 6 7 8 9 37 38 39 79 Text Pcode Pno SH HA VA SD N E ELE END Type 3 4 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 Prog 9 - Survey with no heights Label 4 5 7 8 9 37 38 79 Text Pcode Pno HA VA SD N E END Type 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 5

Prog 10 - Survey without heights and Pcode Label Text Type 5 Pno 4 7 HA 0 8 VA 0 9 SD 0 37 N 0 38 E 0 79 END 5

4.1.13

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

Choice of storage unit

If you press YES or ENT at the question "Logon?" when you create your U.D.S- program , you will be able to choose in 40 which memory unit and in what Job-file all data will be Create a stored when registering. subroutine Note ! If this logon routine is not included Info 10 is shown and no registration can be done even if pressing the REG-key.

Create a subroutine
Look at page 4.1.12. Program 1 is a general U.D.S-program that are useful whenever you want to start a U.D.S sequence. Instead of manually initiating this program you can call upon this program from any of your other U.D.S programs. Simply press ENT and choose type 9, Call (Program 1), at the second step in your U.D.S-program. This means that when you start your U.D.S program, e.g. Program 2, the program automatically initiates program 1, the general U.D.S-program. When the general program is run through you are returned to the next step in program 2.

P40 10:21 P2 Step no 1 Label no=_

Enter program 40 and choose to create program 2. Answer YES to logon. At step 1 press ENT.

ENT

P40 10:21 P2 Step no 1 Label : Special Type =_

9

Choose label type 9, Call, and press ENT.

See next page 4.1.14

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG 40

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

From previous page

Create a subroutine

P40 10:21 P2 Step no 1 Label : Special Call=_

1
YES

Here you enter the program you want to call. In this example we choose program 1 and press YES (ENT).

P40 10:21 P2 Step no 2 Label no=_

Accept the first program step with YES or ENT. Press NO to reenter. Continue with the following program steps.

Now lets start program 2 and see how it works.

STD

P0

10:21
Start program 2.

Program=_

UDS

P2

10:21
First the program runs through the logon procedure and you choose in which Job file you wish to store the data.

Job no=3_

ENT

4.1.15

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG 40

PROGRAM 40 - U.D.S

From previous page

Create a subroutine

UDS P2 10:21 1:Xmem off 2:Imem off 3:Serial off

2
ENT

Choose in which memory unit you wish to store the data.

UDS P1 10:21 Step:2 Store Date=1992.0211_

Now the program calls upon program 1. Enter the general parameters...

YES

UDS P1 10:21 Step:5 Store Instno=69000_

This is the last step in program 1. When you press ENT you will return to step 2 in program 2.

ENT

UDS P2 10:21 Step:2 Store Stn=_

The program will continue step by step to the end of the program.

4.1.16

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG

PROGRAM 41 - DEFINE LABEL

Define Label - In general

With program 41 you can define label no 84-99. Program 41 - Define Label is included in the following program:

41 PRG 41

In general

Program 41 Define Label

Program 40 U.D.S

4.1.17

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG

PROGRAM 41 - DEFINE LABEL

How to use
Turn the instrument on and disengage the dual-axis compensator with function 22.

41 PRG 41

In general

STD P0 10:16 HA=392.9095 VA=102.8955

Select program 41 (Define Label).

PRG

41

ENT

P41 10:16 Label no=_

Choose any label between 84-99. In this example we choose 84 and press ENT.

84

ENT

P41 10:16 Change to=F84

ENT

Here you can see any old definition that may exist. Press the ASCII-key to adopt ASCII-mode and use the ASCII table and key in the appropriate characters, e.g. 71 68 84 32 78 79 (GDT NO) and press ENT.

P41 10:16 Label no=_

When you are ready press only ENT instead of keying in a label no. You will now return to program 0.

4.1.18

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG 43 PRG

PROGRAM 43 - ENTER COORDINATES

Enter Coordinates - In general

With program 43 you can carry out storage of known coordinates. These known values are stored in an Area file. The data contained in these AREA files will take the format 43 Pno, Pcode, Northing, Easting and Elevation and must be In general keyed in manually. Coordinates are entered with up to 7 positions and 3 decimals. Transfer of point coordinates and elevation data banks between computer and the different Geodimeter units is carried out with program 54, File transfer, or by sending serial commands. See part 3, Data communication for more information. As the total number of Area files is unlimited (device memory capacity is only limitation), the same point numbers can be used as long as they are stored in different Area files. Same point numbers can be stored in the same Area file, however, it is always the point nearest the beginning of the file which is recalled for use in Station Establishment -P20 and SetOut P23 calculations. If a particular point has to be updated in an Area file, this can be done with Edit, if the software is installed in your instrument. Program 43 - Enter coordinates is included in the following programs:
Program 43 Enter Coordinates
Program 29 RoadLine Program 39 RoadLine 3D Program 40 UDS Program 61 CoGo

Program 21 Z/IZ Program 23 SetOut Program 24 RefLine

4.1.19

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG 43 PRG 43

PROGRAM 43 - ENTER COORDINATES

How to use
Switch on the instrument and go through the Start procedure until the instrument is in theodolite mode.

How to use

STD P0 10:16 HA=392.9095 VA=102.8955

Select program 43 (Enter Coordinates).

PRG ENT

43

Sel device10:17 1 Imem 2 Xmem

In which device do you want to store the point coordinates. In this example we choose 1 Imem.

P43 10:16 Area=_

Key in the name of the Area file in which you wish to store the point coordinates and height values. In this example we key in 25 and ENT.

25

ENT

P43 10:16 HT measure ?

Do you want to store heights? In this example we choose to do so. Press YES (ENT) to accept or NO to cancel.

YES

4.1.20

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PROGRAM 43 - ENTER COORDINATES

From previous page.

PRG 43

P43 10:17 Pno=

How to use

Key in the first point number you wish to store in the Areafile. In this example we key in 1 and ENT.

1
ENT

P43 10:16 Pno=1 Pcode=_

Here you have an opportunity to enter a Pcode for the point. The program will propose the last Pcode entered. Accept it, key in a new or leave it blank.

ENT

P43 10:16 Pno=1 Pcode=1 N=3456789.012

ENT

Key in the Northing value of point number 1 and press ENT.

P43 10:16 Pno=1 Pcode=1 E=1234567.789

ENT

Key in the Easting value of point number 1 and press ENT.

See next page. 4.1.21

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PROGRAM 43 - ENTER COORDINATES

From previous page.

PRG 43

How to use

P43 10:16 Pno=1 Pcode=1 HT=123.890

ENT

Key in the height of point number 1 and press ENT.

P43 Pno=1 Pcode=1 Store ?

10:17

Press YES to store point number 1 or press NO to cancel. In this example we press YES.

YES

P43 10:17 Pno=_

Key in the next point number or press only ENT when you are finished. In this example we press ENT.

ENT

P0

10:17

You are now returned to program 0.

Temp=20.0_

4.1.22

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG 45

PROGRAM 45 - PCODE

4.1.23

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG

PROGRAM 45 - PCODE

Pcode - In general

Pcode provides the operator with the opportunity of calling upon a point code library which can be directly created from the instrument keyboard. After Pcode library creation and 45 keying in of the Pcode number, the appertaining Pcode name In general will be displayed either for acceptance or rejection and thereafter recording.
45 PRG

How do I create my very own point code library This is done simply by choosing the program No 45=Pcode. It then simply becomes a task of keying in the numerical value of the point code followed by its equivalent alpha or alpha-numerical title. The instrument automatically adopts the ASCII mode for this purpose and you consult the ASCII table in your instrument user manual for the keying in of the alpha/alpha-numerical codes. Pcode numbers range from 1Note !  250; if Nos above this range are chosen INFO 31 is disInfo 31 played. The equivalent alpha point code can contain up to 16 characters; in cases where 16 characters are required, the prompt "Text=" will disappear from the display during the creation of the point code. Maximum of stored points The maximum number of characters which can be stored in the point code library is limited to 800. In other words if all the point codes stored in the library have a maximum number of characters of 16, there would be enough room for 50 point codes. However, as most point codes are abbreviated, the storage room of 800 characters should provide the operator with enough storage place for all point codes her or she will require for storage of detail point code numbers during e.g. a tacheometric exercise.
Note ! 

Note! If using Geodat or an external memory device, the numeric value of the point code is stored, not the title.
4.1.24

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG 45

PROGRAM 45 - PCODE

Activation/deactivation of Pcode After the installation of Pcode in the instrument, it can be activated or deactivated with the help of menu 16-Switches.

In general

Set 10:16 Targ.test on? AIM/REG off? Pcode on?

MNU

16

Menu 16 - Switches

This means that if Pcode is set to ON the keying in of a numerical point code in e.g. an U.D.S, will automatically result in the equivalent alpha/alpha-numerical point code being displayed in the instrument; its correctness is confirmed by pressing ENT. If wrongly keyed in the point code can be overwritten without having to clear the wrongly chosen one with the CL-key. There are however some occasions where operators are very experienced and have been working with only numeric Pcodes on field cards for years. On this occasion the Pcode switch can be switched off. The instrument will always adopt the last chosen ON/OFF mode at switch on. The status of the switch can also be seen when keying in ones first point code number in a U.D.S, i.e. if the point code's equivalent alpha title is seen in the display after keying in the numeric code and pressing ENT, then the switch is set to ON.
Note ! 

Note! In order to correct any wrongly keyed in point code alpha title, so that it corresponds with its numerical point code value, it is necessary to recreate it with the help of Pcode. The changing and deletion of wrongly keyed in data and the insertion of a new can of course be carried out with EDIT, if you have access to this software in the instrument.

4.1.25

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG

PROGRAM 45 - PCODE

Auto dup, auto incr/decr label types When using the Auto dup/auto incr/decr feature with Pcodes in U.D.S's, wrongly keyed in values can be changed without 45 the prompt and its respective value being duplicated in the In general recording device. This is done by using the F4 function; this function must of course be used before pressing the REG key. In cases where ordinary Dup and incr/decr label types are used, use of F4 function will result in the Prompt and its respective data being added to the already in-buffer memory recorded data. In other words, the point code data will be duplicated. This can of course be erased and corrected with EDIT later, if you have access to that particulary software. This of course applies to all data which has been wrongly recorded while using the Auto dup, Incr/Decr in the connected recording device. So even if you have pressed the REG key, it is never to late to erase and/or change and correct wrongly recorded point code data. Correction of wrong and entry of new Pno and SH values can be treated in the same manner.

4.1.26

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG 45

PROGRAM 45 - PCODE

How to use
Switch on the instrument and go through the Start procedure until the instrument is in theodolite mode.
The instruments station has been established. Select program 45 (Pcode).

How to use

STD P0 10:16 HA=392.9095 VA=102.8955

PRG

45

ENT

P45 10:17 Pcode=_

Choose the numerical value of the pcode to which you wish to give an alpha title. In this example we choose 1 and press ENT.

P45 Pcode= Text= ASCII=

ENT

10:17 The instrument adopts the ASCII

mode, key in the complete alpha title or abbreviated alpha title of the point code. In the example we key in 87 65 76 76=W A L L (see the ASCII table).

P45 10:16 Pcode=2

Continue to create your Pcode library in this way until you have stored all the alpha titles you need. When you are finished, press ENT to return to P0. 4.1.27

DATA COLLECTING CHAPTER 1

PRG

PROGRAM 45 - PCODE

Pcode in U.D.S and other programs You have now stored, in the memory of the instrument, the necessary alpha titles of most types of survey detail you 45 require to survey in during your tacheometric task. As soon How to as you have established your instrument over the survey use station at which the survey measurements shall be carried out you can take advantage of the alpha and alpha-numerical Pcodes stored in your Pcode library. When in the U.D.S, the sequence prompts for the point code corresponding to the type of survey detail which is to be measured and stored, all you do is key in the relevant Pcode's numerical value. After its display, confirmation of its correctness is done by pressing ENT on the instrument keyboard. Storage into Geodat or any other external device is finalized by pressing the REG key of the instrument after the point has been measured. Note !  Note! If using a Geodat or an external memory device, the numeric value of the point code is stored, not the title. Pcode can be entered directly in the following programs: U.D.S.

Program 22 Angle Meas Program 45 Pcode Program 23 SetOut Program 24 RefLine Program 29 RoadLine
4.1.28

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Chapter 2

2 Edit & View

Edit
How to use Startup View Edit Directory Examples Change data/Replace with new data Find and Change data Delete/Insert Changing from one file to another Clear memory

4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.9 4.2.12 4.2.16 4.2.17 4.2.18

View

4.2.1

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

In general

With EDIT installed in your Geodimeter, it is possible to carry out editing of the data within the recording device, External memory or Geodat, directly from the keyboard of 2 the Geodimeter instrument. Viewing of the data, before In general editing, can be done with the help of VIEW, which is automatically included in EDIT software additional option.
MNU

You can step through files, search for, delete, insert and change data. EDIT is selected directly from the main menu of the instrument, option 2 - EDITOR. This option is directly linked to a sub-menu which allows you to edit data in either the external memory (Geodat) or the internal memory. The editing features of this software option are menu driven with the command options show on the bottom line of the display, which are in turn directly placed above the relevant operating key of the small keyboard. The various operations are selected by pressing the relevant key. The keyboard is reconfigured to the actual chosen mode and when the bottom line is not visible, the key continues to operate with its original function.

Imem Area 14:50 Area=6 Beg End <-- -->

4.2.2

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

How to use
The program consists of three modes of operation, each with its own menu. The modes are 1 View, 2 Edit and 3 Directory. To enter the editor, follow the instructions below.

MNU

2
How to use

Startup

STD HA: VA:

P0 11:41 Enter the program via menu 2. 41.9087 23.9876

2

MNU

Memory 1 Xmem 2 Imem

11:41 In which memory unit do you want

to work, 2-the internal memory or 1an external memory.

2 You are now displayed the remaining Kbytes free). Press ENT to step

Imem Area 11:41 memory capacity (total number of 31.675 Kby free further.

ENT

See next page

4.2.3

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

View
In this mode you can select which file you want to view. Here you can also use the view functions to step forward or backwards in the file.

2
View mode

Imem Area 14:50 Area=6 Beg End <-- -->

<-- Current memory unit and file type <-- Current file number <-- Command line

Beg Jump to the beginning of the file. End Jump to the end of the file. <- Step to the previous line in the file. - -> Step to the next line in the file.
Note!  Note - arrowkeys

If the arrowkey is held depressed you will automatically step to the next / previous line without having to press the key repeatedly.

ENT

Press this key to step to the next mode = EDIT.

MNU

Press this key to return to the main menu.

4.2.4

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Edit
In this mode you can find, change, insert and delete data in the file you have chosen.

2
Edit mode

Imem Area 14:50

<-- Current memory unit and file type

Area=6 <-- Current file number Del Ins Chg Find <-- Command line

Del Delete current label and prompt or complete file. Deletion of complete files can be executed when the prompt is a filename e.g. Job No. To avoid accidental file deletion a "yes/no" prompt must be answered. Ins Insert a label and prompt in front of the one displayed. Chg Change data relating to displayed label. Find Search for label or label and prompt. When the data value for a prompt is keyed in, the first prompt with that value is displayed.

ENT

Press this key to go to the next mode = DIRECTORY Press this key to return to the main menu

MNU

4.2.5

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Directory
In this mode you can select what type of file you want to view, Area- or Job-file.

2
Directory mode

Imem Area 14:50 Area=6 Dir <- -> Exit

<-- Current memory unit and file type <-- Current file number <-- Command line

Dir: <--:

Switch between the Job and the Area file directory Show name of the file following the one now displayed Show name of the file in front of the one now displayed Exit to the main menu

-->:

Exit:

Note!  Note - arrowkeys

If the arrowkey is held depressed you will automatically increase/decrease the file number without having to press the key repeatedly. Press this key to go to the next mode = VIEW If the current file is not visible in the display a prompt for change to file ? is seen. In the case of answering YES the old file is closed and the new is opened. Answering NO will lead you back to VIEW without file change. Press this key to return to the main menu

ENT

MNU

4.2.6

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Examples
In order to fully appreciate the operating flexibility of EDIT, we will now run through a few examples. It is assumed that before you start the editing examples you should prepare the instrument as follows: Set up the instrument, connect Geodat and survey in a few points using one of your own specially designed UDSs and store them in Geodat. Instead of using a Geodat you can save the points in your internal memory and use the internal memory instead of the external memory in the example below.

MNU

2 2

Examples

Change data / Replace with new data UDS P10 Step:1 Pno=18 16:05 After registration of a point you
realise that the last SH of 0.8m for Pno 17 was wrong. First follow the startup instruction described on page 4.2.3. In this example we choose the external memory.

MNU

Xmem Job 16:05 Job no=1 Beg End <-- -->

REG STD

As you know that it was the last point you first press End to go to the end of the Jobfile. Then you can use the <--=(REG-numeric keyboard or STD-alfanumeric)to step back to the wrong SH.

Xmem Job 16:05 SH=0.8 Beg See next<-- --> End page
ENT

Now press the ENT key to step to the EDIT mode.

See next page 4.2.7

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Change data / Replace with new data (cont.)

From previous page

2
Change/ Replace

Xmem Job 16:05 SH=0.8 Del Ins Chg Find

REG STD

You are now in EDIT mode and you want to change the SH value from 0.8m to 0.5m. Press therefore the CHG key =(REG-numeric keyboard or STD-alfanumeric).

Xmem Job 16:05 Change: SH Data = .8

Key in 0.5 to overwrite the wrongly stored value of 0.8 and accept with ENT. Press only ENT if no change is to be made.

0.5

ENT

Xmem Job 16:05

In order to see that the changed SH

SH=0.5 value has been stored in the correct Beg See next<-- --> place use the arrowkeys. End page
MNU MNU

Press MNU twice to return to the UDS-sequence.

UDS P10 16:05 Step:1 Pno=18

4.2.8

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Find and Change data

Follow the startup instruction described on page 4.2.3. In this example we choose the external memory.

2
Find and Change

STD P0 17:55 HA: 355.3245 VA: 101.4252

MNU

Xmem Job 16:05

You are now in the VIEW mode. Press ENT to go to the EDIT mode. Job no=12 Beg End <-- -->
ENT

Xmem Job 16:05 Job no=12 Del See next pageFind Ins Chg
Note! 
A/M TRK

You wish to find the point No 204 to change its SH to the correct value 1.7. Press the FIND key=(A/M-numeric keyboard, TRK-alfanumeric). Note - Find If wishing to find data try always to be at the front (top) or back (end) of the data file before the search begins. If you go past a value and try to find it, an error will be given, i.e. INFO 32. If wishing to find data which belongs to one particular label, the find routine will jump consecutively through the file from that particular label No. to the next one, jumping the other labels in between.

See next page

4.2.9

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Find and Change data (cont.)

From previous page

2
Find and Change

Xmem Job 16:05 Find Label=

5

In order to first find the point No you first have to choose the label No for Pno. Key in 5 and ENT.

ENT

Xmem Job 16:05 Find: Pno Data=_

Here the Pno is being asked for. Key in 204 and ENT.

204

ENT

Xmem Job 16:05 Pno=204 Beg See next<-- --> End page
A/M TRK

You know that in the UDS you are using SH lies 2 steps after Pno 204. Press the --> key (A/M-numeric keyboard, TRK-alfanumeric) twice or keep it depressed until SH is found.

Xmem Job 16:05 SH=.5 1.7 press the CHG-key=(REGBeg End <-- --> numeric keyboard, STD-alfanumeric).
REG STD

In order to change the SH from .5 to

See next page 4.2.10

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Find and Change data (cont.)

From previous page

2
Find and Change

Xmem Job 16:05 Change: SH Data=.5

1.7

Overwrite the shown data. Key in 1.7 and ENT.

Xmem Job 16:05

The correct SH is now stored in the memory device. SH=1.7 Beg End <-- -->
MNU MNU

Press MNU twice to return to the theodolite mode.

STD P0 16:05 HA: 355.3245 VA: 101.4252

4.2.11

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Delete / Insert
Follow the startup instruction described on page 4.2.3. In this example we choose the external memory.

2
Delete/ Insert

STD P0 17:55 HA: 355.3245 VA: 101.4252

MNU

Xmem Job 16:05 Job no=12 Beg End <-- -->

A/M TRK

Your general data lies at the beginning of your Job data file, so you need only use to depress --> until you come to DATE=1993.0506

Xmem Job 16:05 Date=1993.0506 Beg See next<-- --> End page

You wish to delete this completely and replace it with time. Press ENT to step to the EDIT mode.

ENT

See next page

4.2.12

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Delete / Insert (cont.)

From previous page

2
Delete/ Insert

Xmem Job 16:05 Date=1993.0506 Del Ins Chg Find

Now delete Date by pressing DEL.

Xmem Job 16:05 Stn=101 Beg End <-- -->

ENT

Your next prompt is now displayed. Return to the EDIT mode by pressing ENT.

Xmem Job 16:05 Stn=101 Del See next pageFind Ins Chg
Now insert in front of Stn=101. Press INS.

Xmem Job 16:05 Insert Label=_

You shall insert time first. Label No. for time is 52. Key in 52 and ENT.

56

See next page 4.2.13

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Delete / Insert (cont.)

From previous page

2
Delete/ Insert

Xmem Job 16:05 Insert:Time Data=_

The temp. which you wish to record was the temp. at the time of the actual measurements. Key in 16.05 and ENT.

16.05

Xmem Job 16:05 Time=16.05 Beg End <-- -->

REG TRK

To check that the inserted time data has been inserted into the correct place press the arrow keys.

Xmem Job 16:05 Stn=101 Beg See next<-- --> End page
ENT

Make shure you have Stn=101 in display before inserting the pressure label. Then press ENT to step to the EDIT mode.

Xmem Job 16:05 Stn=101 Del Ins Chg Find

Now choose the Ins function to insert the missing pressure data. Press Ins.

See next page 4.2.14

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Delete / Insert (cont.)

From previous page

2
Delete/ Insert

Xmem Job 16:05 Insert Label=_

The label No. for pressure is 74. Key in 74 and ENT.

74

Xmem Job 16:05 Insert: Press Data=755

The pressure at the time of the measurements was 755 mmHg. Key in 755 and ENT.

755

Xmem Job 16:05 Press=755 Beg See next<-- --> End page

Temp. and Pressure values are now stored in the memory device before Stn.name in the Job no file. Use the arrowkeys to check the position of the prompts and their values.

4.2.15

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Changing from one file to another

Follow the startup instruction described on page 4.2.3. In this example we choose the external memory. Then enter the DIRECTORY mode.

2
Change file

Xmem Job 16:05 Job no=12 Dir <- -> Exit

Here you can page through your Job/ Area files. At the moment you are in the Job file directory. Press <- or -> to page through your list of stored Job files.

Xmem Job 16:05 Job no=13 Beg End <-- -->

ENT

When you come to the next Job No file you are looking for, press ENT.

Xmem Job 16:05 Change to this? Is this the file to which you want to change? Answer YES or NO to Job no=13
See next page
YES

confirm. Press YES.

Xmem Job 16:05 Job no=13 Beg End <-- -->

You are now in the VIEW mode at the top (beginning) of Job file No. 13. Press ENT if you want to EDIT or use the arrowkeys to view the file.

The above example can of course be done with Area files if you had pressed the Area option in the first display shown on this page.
4.2.16

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

EDIT

Clear memory
Follow the startup instruction described on page 4.2.3. In this example we choose the external memory. Then enter the EDIT mode. Xmem Job 16:05 Job no=13 Del Ins Chg Find
In order to delete Job no 13 from the memory press DEL.

2
Clear memory

Xmem Job 16:05 Are you sure?

Here you have a chance to change your mind about total erasure of the file. Press YES or NO.

YES

Xmem Job 16:05 Job no=0 Beg See next<-- --> End page

Job no 13 is now deleted from the memory.

4.2.17

EDIT&VIEW CHAPTER 2
MNU

VIEW EDIT

View
View enables you to retrieve and check data stored in either the external memory (Geodat) and / or the internal memory of Geodimeter. Checking of data is limited to the Job No. file in which you are presently working. To view Job files other than the one in which you are presently working, see Directory, page 4.2.6. The program consists of two modes of operation, 1 View and 2 Directory, which are described on page 4.2.4 and 4.2.6. To step between the two modes use the ENT-key. To start the program follow the startup instruction on page 4.2.3.

MNU

2 2

View

4.2.18

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

Field Calculations PRG

20

Chapter 3
4.3.2 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.12 4.3.23 4.3.32 4.3.38 4.3.41 4.3.48 4.3.56 4.3.58 4.3.61 4.3.63 4.3.65 4.3.67 4.3.68 4.3.70 4.3.73 4.3.76 4.3.80 4.3.84 4.3.91 4.3.100 4.3.107 4.3.134 4.3.228 4.3.243 4.3.307 4.3.331 4.3.335 4.3.341

Station Establishment - P20

How to use Known Station Known Station+ Free Station Point list Configuration

Z/IZ - P21 Angle Meas - P22 SetOut - P23

How to use Countdown to zero method Radial/Right angle offset

RefLine - P24
How to use Known Line Unknown Line Measure Setout with Radofs/RT.ofs Setout with coordinates

Area Calc - P25 DistOb - P26 Obstructed Point - P28 RoadLine - P29 RoadLine3D - P39 MCF (Moving Coordinates Forward) - P27 COGO - P61 AngleMeas Plus - P32 Athletics - P60 Measure Coordinates - P30 Robotic Lite - P33

4.3.1

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20 PRG

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

Station Establishment - In general

Station Establishment (P20) is a basic software package for all Geodimeter System 400/500/600/4000 field calculation programs. This program is used to calculate and store instru20 ment setup data which is required for some of the field calc. In general programs. The programs that follow P20 today are SetOut, RoadLine and RefLine (see Fig. 3.5). If you try to activate any of these programs without first establishing your station, you are taken directly to P20. Program 23 SetOut Program 24 RefLine Program 29 RoadLine 2D Program 39 RoadLine 3D
Fig. 3.5. Station establishment is necessary for running the above programs

Program 20 Station Establishment

Program 20 Station Establishment

The program is divided into three main functions: 1. Known station for station establishment when the coordinates of your station point and reference object are known. for free station establishment using 2-10 points whose coordinates are known. for station establishment when the coordinates of your station point and up to ten reference objects are known.
4.3.2

2. Free station

3. Known station+

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

1&3 Known Station

When establishing a station at a known point, you will only need the point numbers for your station point and reference 20 object. The instrument will then calculate bearing and disIn general tance automatically. To increase the accuracy of the bearing a new routine called "Known Station+" has been implemented in the instrument. By using this function you can measure to up to ten reference objects and also obtain a standard deviation (S_dev). See more about this routine on page 4.3.12. When running Known Station in P20, you decide whether or not elevations are to be used in other calculation programs. Here you also indicate in what Job file station data and possibly other data to be calculated later will be stored, and in what Area file the coordinates are stored. See on page 4.3.22 what is stored in the selected Job file when a Known Station has been established. Preparations Before station establishment can take place, the coordinates and point numbers must be stored in an Area file either in the internal memory or in an external memory such as Card Memory or Geodat using P43 (Enter Coordinates) or downloaded from a computer. These coordinates are then used in P20 when you retrieve the correct Area file and Pno.

2. Free Station
You choose free station establishment when the station point is unknown that is, N, E and possibly ELE will have to be calculated. This function allows free establishment in which several different combinations of objects, angles and distances can be used. The calculation is a combination of resectioning and triangulation. If you make several measurements, you obtain not only the mean value but also the standard deviation (S_dev). The calculation is done according to the least square adjustment method. If good
4.3.3

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

results are to be obtained using this method, it is important that the traverses and networks are of high quality. For this reason we have provided the Free Station routine with a 20 function called Config. (configuration). This allows you to In general use factors such as the scale factor (stored under label = 43), weight factors to weight your points with regard to the distance from your free station to the known point (used mainly in Germany), and also to create a point list in which all measured data for each individual measured point can be made available for editing and possible recalculation. In the example on page 4.3.24 we have chosen not to use Config. but to treat it separately on page 4.3.38. Free station establishment can be done with a large number of different combinations of points, angles, and distances (see Fig. 3.6) Note !  With free station establishment using 3-10 known points, the If only 3 following combinations are possible: angles 1. Angles and distances are used, 2. Only angles. But note that three points alone will not try to establish provide enough data to be able to calculate an optimal within solution that is, they will not give a standard deviation.
the triangle in order to avoid the dangerous circle. 1101 1102
1101

Stn.

1104 1103 Fig. 3.6 Free station establishment

4.3.4

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

In free station establishment with two known points, the following is valid: 1. Angles and distances.

In general

1101

Point di

ff Ok?

1102

Fig. 3.7. Free station establishment with 2 known points

1101

4.3.5

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

How to use
The examples that follow deal with three kinds of station establishment: Known Station, Known Station+ and Free Station. It is assumed that you are familiar with the operation of your Geodimeter instrument. Switch on the instrument and go step by step through program 0 until you are in theodolite position that is, HA and VA are shown on the display.

PRG 20 20

How to use

1 Known station STD HA: VA: P0 10:16 234.5678 92.5545

The instrument is now in theodolite position. Select P20 (Station Establishment).

PRG

20
ENT

N.B.  An example of free station establishment is found on page 4.3.24.

Stn.estab 10:16 1 Known station 2 Free station 3 Known station+

In this first example we will establish a station with a known point and reference object. These are stored as Pno and coordinates in an Area file, using P43 (Enter Coordinates). Pno 1101 is our station point and Pno 1102 is our reference object, as in the example on page 4.3.7. Now we will select option 1, Known Station.

See next page 4.3.6

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

1101

1101

1102

Fig 3.8. Station establishment with a known station and one reference object

4.3.7

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

Station establishment with a known station P20 10:16 Job no=_

Here you key in the number or name of the Job file in which you wish to store data from your station establishment. A list of data stored in the selected Job file can be seen on page 4.3.22. Select, for example, Job no = 2.

Known Stn.

2
ENT

P20 10:17 1:Imem off 2:Xmem off 3:Serial off 1

ENT

Where will you store your Job file? Choose a suitable memory unit by indicating 1, 2 or 3 for activation/ deactivation. Then press ENT. Here we have chosen to work with the internal memory.

P20 10:17
Key in your station number.

Stn=_

1101 Note !  See note on 4.3.26. ENT

P20 10:17 Area=_

Key in the name of the Area file in which you have stored your station point and your reference object. If you leave the line blank you are able to enter the coordinates manually.

See next page 4.3.8

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page

PRG

1
20

ENT

ENT

Known Stn.

Sel device10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

In which memory unit is the Area file stored? In this example we are using the internal memory (Imem).

Note !  Enter the coordinates manually.

Coord N=xxxx E=xxxx ELE=xx

10:17

ENT

Enter the coordinates manually Enter your station coordinates. Leave the ELE blank for no height establishment. (This display will only appear if you have left the Area file line blank.

Stn ok? N=xxxx E=xxxx ELE=xx

ENT

10:17

Are your coordinates correct? Press Yes (ENT) to accept them. If you press NO you will return to the question about STN= and Area=. If the coordinates have to be changed, use Edit or P43 (Enter Coordinates). In this example we will continue by accepting them.

Note !  Only shown if your coordinates includes ELE.

10:17 HT measure?

Are you going to measure heights? Accept this question by pressing ENT (Yes). If you decide not to measure heights (press No) it means that the instrument height (IH) and signal height (SH) will be ignored. In this example, we will be measuring heights. Press ENT.

See next page 4.3.9

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page

Known Stn. Note !  Only shown if your coordinates includes ELE.

10:18 ELE= x.xxx Replace Z?

ENT

This is your old station ground elevation. Press ENT (Yes) if you want to replace the old elevation with the new or press NO to cancel it. In this example we press ENT. (This display will only appear if the ground elevation has already been determined).

10:18 IH=
Enter your instrument height (IH). For example, 1.75.

Note !  Only shown if your coordinates includes ELE.

1.75

ENT

10:18 Refobj=
1102 ENT

Key in the Pno of your reference object. For example, 1102.

10:18 Area= 1 Ref ok ? N=xxxx E=xxxx ELE =xx

ENT

Key in the name of the Area file in which you have stored your reference object. If you leave the line blank you will have the opportunity to enter the coordinates manually in the same way as for the station coordinates. Are your coordinates correct? Press ENT to accept them. If you press NO you return to the question Refobj=. If they have to be changed, use Edit or P43 (Enter Coordinates). We will continue by accepting them.

4.3.10

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page

PRG

ENT
20

10:18
Known Stn.

Aim at your reference object. Then press the A/M key.

Aim to refobj. Press A/M

A/M

STD P20 10:18 HA ref: xx.xxxx HA: : xx.xxxx Reg=Exit

HAref is the calculated bearing between the station point and the reference point. If you wish to check the distance to the reference object, press ENT. Otherwise press REG to store the station establishment.

ENT

STD P20 10:18 SHD: xxx.xxx HD : Reg=Exit

If the reference object is marked with a reflector, you can also check the horizontal distance by pressing the A/M key. Otherwise press REG to store the station establishment.

A/M

Note !  PRESS REG

STD P20 10:19 SHD: xxx.xxx HD : xxx.xxx Reg=Exit

REG

Here you can compare the calculated distance with the actual measured distance. Press REG to store station establishment in the Job file you have chosen (see page 4.3.22). Note ! The REG key must always be used if you want to store the station establishment.

4.3.11

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

3 Known station+ (known station with 1-10 reference objects) STD HA: VA: P0 10:16 234.5678 92.5545
The instrument is now in theodolite position. Select P20 (Station Establishment).

PRG 20 ENT

Note !  An example of free station establishment is found on page 4.3.24

Stn.estab 10:16 1.Known Station 2.Free Station 3.Known Station+

In this first example we will establish a station with a known point and reference objects. These are stored as Pno and coordinates in an Area file, using P43 (Enter Coordinates). Pno 1101 is our station point and Pno 1102, 1103 and 1104 are our reference objects, as in the example on page 4.3.13. Now we will select function 3, Known Station+.

See next page.

4.3.12

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

1104

1101

1101

1103

1102

Fig 3.9. Station establishment with a known station and 1-10 reference objects

4.3.13

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

Station establishment with Known station+ P20 10:16 Job no =

Here you key in the number or name of the Job file in which you wish to store data from your station establishment. A list of data stored in the selected Job file can be seen on page 4.3.22. Select, for example, Job no = 2.

Known stn+

2
ENT

P20 10:17 1. Xmem off 2. Imem off 3. Serial off

2
ENT

Where will you store your Job file? Choose a suitable memory unit by indicating 1, 2 or 3 for activation/ deactivation. Then press ENT. Here we have chosen to work with the internal memory.

P20 10:17 Stn =

Key in your station number.

1101 ENT

P20 10:17 Area =

Key in the name of the Area file in which you have stored your station point and your reference object. If you leave the line blank you are able to enter the coordinates manually.

See next page. 4.3.14

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page

PRG

1
20

ENT

Known stn+

Sel device10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

In which memory unit is your Area file stored? In our example, we are using the internal memory (Imem).

2 From previous page Enter the coordinates manually

Note !  Enter the coordinates manually

Coord N=xxxx E=xxxx ELE=xx

ENT

10:17

Enter your station coordinates. Leave the ELE blank for no height establishment.

Stn ok ? N=xxxx E=xxxx ELE=xx

YES

Are your coordinates correct? Press Yes (ENT) to accept them. If you press No you will return to the question about Stn= and Area=. If the coordinates have to be changed, use Edit or P43 (Enter Coordinates). In this example we will continue by accepting them.

10:17
Note !  Only shown if your coordinates includes ELE.

HT measure ?

See next page.

Are you going to measure heights? Accept this question by pressing ENT (Yes). If you decide not to measure heights (press No) it means that the instrument height (IH) and signal height (SH) will be ignored. In this example, we will be measuring heights. Press YES.

4.3.15

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page.

PRG YES 20

Known stn+ Note !  Only shown if your coordinates includes ELE.

10:18 ELE= x.xxx Replace Z?

YES

This is your old station ground elevation. Press YES (ENT) if you want to replace the old elevation with the new or press NO to cancel it. In this example we press YES. (This display will only appear if the ground elevation has already been determined).

10:18 Enter your instrument height (IH).

For example, 1.75.
Note !  Only shown if your coordinates includes ELE.

IH =

1.75

ENT

Key in the Pno of your reference object. For example, 1102.

Pno =

1102

ENT

Area =
1
ENT

Key in the name of the Area file in which you have stored your reference object. If you leave the line blank you will have the opportunity to enter the coordinates manually in the same way as for the station coordinates. Are your coordinates correct? Press YES to accept them. If you press No you return to the question Refobj=. If they have to be changed, use Edit or P43 (Enter Coordinates). We will continue by accepting them. 4.3.16

Ref ok ? N=xxxx E=xxxx ELE =xx

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page

PRG YES 20

10:18 SH: 0.000_

Known stn+ Note !  Only shown if height should be determined

Enter the signal height (SH) and press ENT

ENT

STD P20 10:18* HA:xxx.xxxx VA:xxx.xxxx

The instrument is now in theodolite position and is ready to measure. Aim at the chosen target. Press the A/M key if distance is to be measured, otherwise REG.

A/M

STD P20 10:18* HA:xxx.xxxx VA:xxx.xxxx SD:xxx.xxx

The instrument displays HA, VA and SD for your first point. Your measurement can now be registered. Press the REG key.

REG

Note !  Diff HD is shown only if distance has been measured

Result Diff HD: -0.003 Ref ok?

YES

Here the difference between measured and theoretical horizontal distance (HD) is shown. Press YES to accept or NO to redo the measurement or select another reference point.

4.3.17

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page

PRG 20

10:19 more?

Known stn+

Are you going to use more points for your station establishment, or are you satisfied with only one? In our example we will measure and register two more points (maximum number = 10). Press YES.

YES

10:19 Pno = xxxx

Note ! 
ENT

Enter the next Pno to be used for your known station (the display here shows the most recently used Pno). Then press ENT. Note! The points selected for your station establishment can be measured in any order.

Ref ok? N=xxxx.xxx E=xxxx.xxx ELE=xxx.xxx

Are your coordinates correct? Press YES or NO. If they have to be changed, use Edit or P43 (Enter Coordinates). In this case, well answer YES.

YES

10:20
Note !  Only shown if your coordinates include ELE.

Enter the signal height (SH). In this case 1 and press ENT.

SH=0.000

ENT

4.3.18

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page

PRG 20

Known stn+

STD 10:20* HA:xxx.xxxx VA:xxx.xxxx

Aim towards your target, then press the A/M key to measure.

Note!  If you are using a servo instrument press the key to position to point 2-10. Fine adjust manually.

A/M

STD 10:20* HA:xxx.xxxx VA:xxx.xxxx SD:xx.xxx

The instrument has now measured angles and distance to the second point of your known station establishment. Press REG to register your measured data.

REG

Result Diff HD:0.003 Diff HA:0.0032 Ref ok?

Note! 
YES

Diff HD is the difference between measured and theoretical horizontal distance to the second point. Diff HA is the difference between theoretical and measured angle between point 1 and 2.Press YES to accept or NO to redo the measurement. Note! If more than 2 points have been measured, Diff HA will be replaced by S_dev HA, i.e the standard deviation of the horizontal angles. Are you going to use more points for your station establishment, or are you satisfied with two? In our example we will measure and register one more point (maximum number = 10). Press Yes. 4.3.19

STD more?

10:21

YES

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page.

PRG 20

10:22 Pno =

Known stn+

Note!  If you are using a servo instrument press the key to position to point 2-10. Fine adjust manually.

Key in the third point to be used, and repeat the procedure described above. In this example, we have measured and stored a total of three points whose coordinates are known for our known station. Assuming that these have been measured and registered, let us continue directly to the question more? after storing the last point.

STD more?

10:22

All points to be used for our known station establishment are now stored. Answer more? with NO. The program immediately calculates your station coordinates.

NO

Select 10:22 1 Exit 2 Point list 3 Recalc

ENT

Now you're taken to the Select menu. Here you can choose to either exit P20, edit the point list, recalculate the point data or add more points. (You can switch between the two pages by pressing the ENT button).In this example we choose to edit the point list. Press 2.

Select 10:22 4 Add point

2
4.3.20

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page.

PRG 20

Known stn+

On? Pno: xx Diff HD: -x.xxx Diff HA: x.xxxx

Here you can choose which points you want to use in the point list. Choose On, Off or Delete by pressing the NO button, then accept with ENT.

ENT

Result List:3 Used:3 S_dev HA:x.xxxx Press ENT

ENT

When you have choosen your points for the point list and accepted with ENT, calculation automatically starts and the result is shown in the display. Press ENT to exit to the Select menu.

Select 10:23 1 Exit 2 Point list 3 Recalc

Now you're taken back to the Select menu. Here you can choose to either exit P20, edit the point list once again, recalculate the point data (i.e se the result once again) or add more points. (Switch between the pages with ENT).

ENT

Select 10:23 4 Add point

Press 4 if you want to add points to improve the result. In this example we're satisfied with the result. Press 1 to exit P20. Note that the current instrument direction is stored as HA_ref.

1
4.3.21

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

Job File (1 ref point)

20

Job File (2-10 ref points)

2 37,38,(39) 62 37,38,(39) 21 11 3 Stn 2 Stn Coordinates 37,38,(39) RefObj 5 SH 6 RefObj Coords 37,38,(39) Raw data 7,8,(9) Weight =s/1 if OFF 0 Info: Diff HA or S_dev HA 0 Info: Point list 0 RefObj 5 Delta HD (if available) 76 Delta HA 45 Stn 2 Stn Coordinates 37,38,(39) RefObj=Blank 62 RefObj Coords=0.000 37,38,(39) HA_ref* 21 HD=0 11 IH 3

Store data Known Stn

Job File Stn Stn Coordinates RefObj RefObj Coords HA_ref* HD IH

Here are the data that can be stored in the Job file you have choosen. * HA_ref for Known Station = calculated and Set HA, HA_ref for Known Station+ = Current instrument direction when exiting P20.

4.3.22

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

1108 1107

1101

Free Stn.

1106

1105

Fig 3.10. Free station establishment

4.3.23

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20 PRG 20 ENT

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

Free station establishment

Select Program 20.

Free stn

Stn estab.10:19 1.Known Station 2.Free Station 3.Known Station+

In this example, we will establish a free station. The known points we will be using have been stored as Pno and coordinates in an Area file using P43 (Enter Coordinates). Well choose function 2, Free Station.

P20 10:19 Job no =

Here you key in the number or name of the Job file in which you wish to store data from your station establishment. A list of data stored in the selected Job file can be seen on pages 4.3.35, 37. Select, for example, Job no = 20.

20 ENT

P20 10:19 1. Xmem off 2. Imem off 3. Serial off

2

Where will you store your Job file? Choose a suitable memory unit by indicating 1, 2 or 3 for activation/ deactivation. Then press ENT.

ENT

See next page. 4.3.24

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page

PRG 20

P20 10:20 Stn =

Free stn

Here you enter a name/number for your free station. You decide this for yourself.

ENT

P20 10:20 HT Measure?

Are you going to measure heights? Accept this question by pressing YES (ENT). If you decide not to measure heights (press No) it means that the instrument height (IH) and signal height (SH) will be ignored. In this example, we will be measuring heights. Press YES.

YES

2ENT

See next page.

4.3.25

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page.

PRG 20

P20 10:20 IH=0.000

Enter your instrument height (IH). For example 1.75

Free stn Note !  Only shown if height should be determined.

1.75 ENT

P20 10:20 Area =

ENT

Key in the name of the Area file in which you have stored your known Pno and coordinates. Then press ENT.

Sel device10:20 1. Xmem 2. Imem

Note !  Info 32

In which memory unit is your Area file stored? In our example, we are using the internal memory (Imem). Note ! If you get Info 32 when selecting a memory unit, it may be due to one of the following: 1. You have chosen the wrong memory unit. 2. The Area file you are looking for is not located in the memory you have selected. 3. The Stn (Pno) which you are looking for is not stored in the Area file you have selected. The program will then return to the question Area =" so that you can enter another Area file number or point number.

See next page.

4.3.26

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page.

PRG 20

10:21 you want to aim at. Then press ENT. Pno =

Enter the number of the first point

Free stn

ENT

Pno N = E = ELE

ok? xxxxx.xxx xxxxx.xxx = xxx.xx

Are your coordinates correct? Press YES (ENT) to accept them. If they have to be changed, use Edit or P43 (Enter Coordinates). In this example we will continue by accepting them.

YES

10:21 Enter the signal height (SH).

Note !  Only shown if height should be determined.

For example 2.1 and press ENT.

SH = 0.000

2.1 ENT

See next page 4.3.27

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page.

PRG 20

Free stn

STD 10:21* HA:xxx.xxx VA:xxx.xxx

The instrument is now in theodolite position and is ready to measure. Aim at the chosen target. Press the A/M key if distance is to be measured, otherwise REG. Note ! Distance measurement must be carried out when measuring heights.

Note! 
A/M

STD 10:21* HA:xxx.xxx VA:xxx.xxx SD:xxx.xx

The instrument displays HA, VA and SD for your first point. Your measurement can now be registered. Press the REG key.

REG

10:21 Pno =xxxx

Enter the next Pno to be used for your free station (the display here shows the most recently used Pno). Then press ENT.

Note !
ENT

Note ! The points selected for your station establishment can be measured in any order.

See next page. 4.3.28

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

Free stn

Pno ok? N=xxxx E=xxxx ELE=xxx

YES

Are your coordinates correct? Press YES or NO. If they have to be changed, use Edit or P43 (Enter Coordinates). In this case, well answer YES.

10:21
Note !  Only shown if your coordinates include ELE.

Enter the signal height (SH). In this case 3 and press ENT.

SH=0.000
3
ENT

STD 10:21* HA:xxx.xxx VA:xxx.xxx

Aim at your target. Then press the A/M key to measure distance.

A/M

STD 10:21* HA:xxx.xxx VA:xxx.xxx SD:xx.xx

REG

The instrument has now measured angles and distance to the second point of your free station establishment. Your measured data can now be registered.

See next page. 4.3.29

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page.

PRG 20

STD
Free stn

10:21

more?

YES

Are you going to use more points for your station establishment, or are you satisfied with only two? Note! If complete measurements have been carried out that is, angles and distances two points will suffice. If, on the other hand, only angles have been measured, at least three points are needed. This is not an optimal solution, and the display warns you with the message Not Optimized. In our example we will measure and register two more points (maximum number = 10). Press YES.

10:22
Note! If you are using a servo instrument press the key to position to point 3-10. Fine adjust manually.

Pno =xxxx

Key in the third point to be used, and repeat the procedure described above. In this example, we have measured and stored a total of four points whose coordinates are known for our free station. Assuming that these have been measured and registered, let us continue directly to the question more? after storing the last point.

STD more?

10:22

All points to be used for our free station establishment are now stored. Answer more? with NO. The program immediately calculates your station coordinates.

NO

See next page. 4.3.30

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page.

PRG 20

Free stn

STD 10:22 N: xxxxx.xxx E: xxxxx.xxx S_dev: x.xxx

These are your new station coordinates plus any standard deviation there may be. To see the standard deviation in N and E plus the scale factor used, switch the display by pressing the ENT key.

ENT

STD 10:22 S_devX:xxx.xxx S_devY:xxx.xxx SF = 1.00000

This is the standard deviation in N and E plus the scale factor used (scale factor = 1.0000 if it is off.) Press ENT.

ENT

STD 10:22 ELE = xxx.xxx S_devZ= x.xxx

Here is your calculated station elevation shown if you have chosen to measure heights. Here you can also see the standard deviation based on all observations. If the standard deviation or difference in elevation (in the case of 2 points) is to large redo the measurement again without storing the actual. Note ! On the following pages we will describe how to use the point list. See page 4.3.36 if you have deactivated the point list.

Note !  Pointlist OFF, see page 4.3.36

ENT

See next page. 4.3.31

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

How to use the point list

In this example we will take a closer look at the point list which is obtained after you have established your free station (here we assume that the point list has been activated under Config.).

How to use Pointlist ON

Free Stat.10:16 1. Pointlist 2. Recalc. 3. Exit

1

The point list allows you to look at, and deactivate, any deviations there may be for each point. The deviations are displayed as dev. = (radial deviation) and RT.ofs/Radofs (right offset and radial offset). Well select point 1.

Free Stat.10:16 1. dev. 2. RT.ofs/Radofs

1

Here you can look at 1 (dev = radial deviation). If there is a major radial deviation, you can make a more detailed analysis by selecting 2 (RT.ofs/Radofs). 2

This is the difference in distance that is, how much to the left (- value) Pno = 1 or right (+ value) your theoretical RT.ofs=x.xxx on point lies relative to your measured on=1 off=0 point (see Fig. 3.11, page 4.3.39). Select activation/deactivation and then press ENT. STD 10:16 Here the radial error is displayed for point no. 1. For an explanation Pno = 1 ENT of "dev", see page 4.3.39. By Diff = x.xxx pressing ENT you can check the radial errors for all the points. This is the difference in distance between ENT your measured point and the theoretical point, along the line of measurement. A minus sign indicates that the measured point lies beyond the theoretical point. A plus sign indicates that it is ahead of that point. See next page. 4.3.32

Pno = 1 Radofs=x.xxx on on=1 off=0

See next page.

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page.

ENT

From previous page.

ENT

How to use Pointlist ON

This page is shown for all points that have 2 coordinates and one measured distance. Any one of Pno = 1 these points can be used for cal- dELE = XXX on culation of the station height. on=1 Off=0 The displayed value is the difference between the calculated average height and the height, calculated from this point only. After going through the point list and possibly deactivating one or more parameters of your points, you will have to recalculate using the coordinates you want for your free station establishment. Do this by selecting function 2, Recalc.

Free Stat.10:16 1. Pointlist 2. Recalc. 3. Exit

STD 10:16 N: 61732.568 E: 21806.327 S_dev: 0.002

These are your new station coordinates together with the resulting standard deviation in N and E. To see the standard deviation in N and E plus the scale factor used, switch the display by pressing the ENT key.

ENT

STD 10:16 S_devX: S_devY: SF = 1.00000

ENT

This is the standard deviation in N and E plus the scale factor that has been used (scale factor = 1.0000 if it is Off). Press ENT.

See next page. 4.3.33

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page

How to use Pointlist ON

STD 10:16 ELE = xxxx.xxx S_devZ = x.xxx

ENT

Here is your calculated station elevation shown if you have chosen to measure heights. Here you can also see the standard deviation based on all observations. If the standard deviation or difference in elevation (in the case of 2 points) is to large redo the measurement again without storing the actual.

Free Stat.10:16 1. Pointlist 2. Recalc. 3. Exit

3

Here you select function 3, Exit.

This is your old station ground

STD 10:16 elevation. ELE= xxx.xxx Press YES (ENT) if you want to Replace Z ? replace the old elevation with the new
or press No to cancel it. In this example we press YES. (This display will only appear if the station ground elevation has already been determined).

YES

STD Store ?

10:16

YES

Now the instrument is orientated. Do you want to store the point in an Area file answer this question with YES (ENT). Note that the current instrument direction is stored as HA_ref.

See next page 4.3.34

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page.

PRG 20

P0 Area =

10:16

Store data

Key in the name of the Area file in which you want to store the point. Then press ENT.

ENT

Sel device10:16 1. Xmem 2. Imem

2
Note !  Data that can be stored in the selected Job or Area file.

In which memory unit is your Area file to be stored? In our example we are using the internal memory (Imem).

Pointlist ON Area File

Pno (Stn) N E S_dev ELE Info: S_dev_Z 5 37 38 46 39 0

Job File
Pno 5 SH 6 Coord 37,38,(39) Raw data 7,8,(9) Scale factor =1 if OFF 0 Weight =s/1 if OFF 0 dHA* 45 S_dev 46 Info: S_dev_Z 0 Info=Point list 0 Pno 5 Used raw data (Ang, Dist, Height) 0 dN 40 dE 41 dELE 42 Stn no 2 Stn coordinates 37,38,(39) RefObj= Blank 62 RefObj coordinates=0.000 37,38,(39) HA_ref 21 HD=0 11 IH 3

Note !  Only if Point List is on in configuration

* dHA=correction value of the calculated bearing (orientation), which is normally a low figure.

Here are the data that can be stored in the Job or Area file you have chosen, if you have activated the point list in the configuration routine.

4.3.35

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From page 4.3.31

PRG 20

Free stn Pointlist OFF

10:21 ELE = x.xxx Replace Z?

YES

This is your old station ground elevation. Press YES (ENT) if you want to replace the old elevation with the new or press No to cancel it. In this example we press ENT. (This display will only appear if the ground elevation has already been determined). Now the instrument is orientated. Do you want to store the point in an Area file answer this question with YES (ENT). Note that the current instrument direction is stored as HA_ref.

Store ?

YES

P20 Area =

10:21

Key in the name of the Area file in which you want to store the point. Then press ENT.

ENT

Sel device10:21 1. Xmem 2. Imem

Note ! 

In which memory unit is your Area file to be stored? In our example we are using the internal memory (Imem). Note ! See next page for a list over the data that can be stored in the selected Job or Area file.

See next page

4.3.36

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page

Store data Note !  Data that can be stored in the selected Job or Area file.

Pointlist OFF Job File

Pno 5 SH 6 Coord 37,38,(39) Raw data 7,8,(9) Scale factor =1 if OFF 0 Weight =s/1 if OFF 0 dHA* 45 S_dev 46 Info: S_dev_Z 0 Stn no 2 Stn coordinates 37,38,(39) RefObj= Blank 62 RefObj coordinates=0.000 37,38,(39) HA_ref 21 HD=0 11 IH 3

Area File
Pno (Stn) N E S_dev ELE Info: S_dev_Z 5 37 38 46 39 0

* dHA=correction value of the calculated bearing (orientation), which is normally a low figure. Here are the data that can be stored in the Job or Area file you have chosen, if you have deactivated the point list in the configuration routine.

4.3.37

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 20

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

How to use "Config." in Free Station

In this example, we will describe in greater detail the routine in the free station establishment program called Config.. This option can only be accessed when starting the program with a long press on the PRG-key, see page 4.2.

How to use Config

P20 1 Run 2 Config

10:15

Press 1 to start the program or select 2 to configurate the program. In this example we press 2. Config.

P20 10:15 1 Exit 2 Options

Press 1 Exit to return to the previous menu or press 2 options to start the configuration. In this example we press 2.

2 Here you are given an opportunity to activate/deactivate a scale factor. The scale factor for free station establishment is calculated and defined based on the internal relation between your known points. The following applies for the scale factor: Scale factor = 1.0000 if it is not activated (Off). If a UTM scale factor (F43) has been given, this value is multiplied by the scalefactor calculated for free station establishment. The scale factor that has been used is displayed after calculation of your free station (see page 4.3.31). In this example, we will activate the scale factor.

P20

10:15

Scalefactor on on=1 off=0

1
ENT

See next page.

4.3.38

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page..

PRG 20

How to use Config

P20

10:15

Pointlist on on=1 off=0

1
ENT

Here you can activate/deactivate a point list. In the list you will be able to analyse and alter any deviations for each point. The deviations are displayed as dev (radial deviation) and RT.ofs/Radofs (right offset and radial offset). See Fig. 3.11 below. Note ! For a more detailed explanation of how to work with the point list, see page 4.3.32.

See next page.

Theoretical point

s .Of RT

Ra dia l

dN

fs Rado

Measurd point

dE

Fig. 3.11. Definition of deviations presented in the point list

4.3.39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 20 - STATION ESTABLISHMENT

From previous page.

PRG 20

How to use Config

P20 10:15 Weightfactor s/1 on on=1 off=0

Note !  Formulas for calculating the weight factor (for the German market). 100/S
P20 10:15 Weightfactor 100/s off on=1 off=0

1000/S

3/2

P20 10:15 Weightfactor 1000/s**3/2off on=1 off=0

1000/S

By using a weight factor you can give priority to your known points with reference to distance. To put it simply, points that are further from your free station have a lower priority than the points that are closer. This function is used mostly in Germany. Normally no weight factor is used when the network is of good quality. This means that you should choose the weight factor that is defined as s/1. By pressing the ENT key in steps you can produce three different bases of calculation for the weight factor (see the margin, left). These are intended mainly for Germany, and are not used otherwise. Since we will not be using this function and since weight factor s/1 is the default in position ON, you need press only ENT until the display shows...

P20 10:15 Weightfactor 1000/s**2 off on=1 off=0

P20 10:15 1 Exit 2 Options

Here you can choose to continue with your free station establishment, or repeat your configuration. If you continue with free station establishment, press 1 and then choose 1 Run to start the program. See page 4.3.24 for instructions.

4.3.40

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 21 - Z/IZ

Z/IZ - In general

Z/IZ is a program for calculating instrument elevation. It will provide several results, such as the ground point elevation or the instrument point elevation. These are obtained by 21 measuring the vertical angle and length of slope to one or In general more points of known height. This field calculation is also called instrument point elevation resection, as the mean height and standard deviation are calculated from all the observations. Z/IZ can be used in a number of applications. For example, it is naturally advantageous to combine Z/IZ and Station Establishment /Free Station when having established your station point in only two dimensions (N and E). By combining these two programs, the three-dimensional coordinates of a point can be calculated and stored in the same Area file and under the same point number in the memory unit you select. In such cases, free station establishment shall be carried out before measuring elevation. Z/IZ also includes P43 (Enter Coordinates).
21 PRG

Program 21 Z/IZ

Program 20 Station Establishment

Program 43 Enter Coordinates

4.3.41

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 21 PRG 21

PROGRAM 21 - Z/IZ

How to use
One application for which Z/IZ is ideal is to determine the height of a point whose coordinates are known that is, in combination with P20 (Free Station function). In the example below, we have chosen to carry out this kind of measurement and calculation. It is assumed that you have already established your station (P20, see page 4.3.2) and that the points whose coordinates are known are stored in an Area file. However, P21 can also be used independently for height calculation.
The instruments station has been established. Select program 21 (Z/IZ).

How to use

P0

10:16

Temp = 20.0

PRG

21

ENT

P21 10:17 Stn=1

Key in your station number and press ENT.

ENT

Sel device10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

In what memory unit is your Area file stored? In this example, we are using the internal memory (Imem).

4.3.42

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 21 - Z/IZ

From previous page.

PRG 21

STD

P21 10:17

How to use

Area =

2
ENT

Key in the number of the Area file in which we have stored the points whose coordinates are known, which we shall be using to determine the height of our free station. In this example, these are located in Area = 2. If you leave the Area file blank you will be able to manually key in point elevation later on.

P21 10:17
Note !  Important

IH =

Here you decide whether you want to measure instrument point elevation or ground point elevation. If IH is given, the ground point elevation will be calculated. If no instrument height is given, the instrument point elevation will be calculated. In this example, we assign IH = 1.7 m. Consequently the ground point elevation will be calculated.
IH = 1.7m

1.7 ENT

Ground point elevation

SH = 1.0m

P21 10:17 Pno =

Give the point number for the first reference point stored in the Area file. This display will not be shown if you have left the Area file blank above.

ENT

See next page. 4.3.43

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 21 - Z/IZ

From previous page.

PRG 21

STD ELE =

P21 10:17

How to use

The elevation is shown for the reference point selected. If you left the Area file blank earlier you are able to manually key in point elevation.

ENT

P21 SH =

10:17

Here you give the signal height (SH). This must be given whether the instrument point elevation or ground point elevation is to be calculated. In this example, SH = 1.0 m.

1.0 ENT

STD P21 10:17 HA:xxx.xxx VA:xxx.xxx

Now you can begin to measure your first reference point. Aim and then press the A/M key.

A/M

STD P21 10:17* HA:xxx.xxx VA:xxx.xxx SD:xx.xxx

The display shows HA, VA and SD to Pno 1. Your measurement is now ready to be registered. Press the REG key.

See next page. 4.3.44

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 21 - Z/IZ

From previous page.

PRG REG 21

How to use

P21 10:18 more?

YES

Will you use several points for your height calculation or will one point be enough? Note the following: Your result will indicate a mean elevation. This is presented as a difference if two points are included in the measurement. If, on the other hand, you use 3 or more points, a standard deviation (S_dev) is obtained, based on all the observations. In this example we shall measure two additional points whose heights are known. Therefore answer the question with Yes (ENT). Give reference point 2, which is to be used for height determination, and repeat the instruction above. In this example we have also measured and stored a third point. We assume now that these measurements are concluded and we continue directly to the question more? after storing Pno 3.

P21 10:18 Pno =

P21 10:19 more?

All the points to be used for height determination are now stored. Answer the question more? with No. The program now immediately calculates any standard deviation.

NO

See next page. 4.3.45

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 21 - Z/IZ

From previous page.

PRG 21

How to use

P21 10:19 S_dev = x.xxx S_dev ok ?

This is the standard deviation based on all the observations. If the standard deviation or difference in elevation (in the case of 2 points) should be too large, answer the question (Diff ok?) S_dev ok? with No, and perform the measurements again.

YES

STD

P21 10:19

ELE = xx.xxxx

This is the ground point elevation of your free station. Press ENT.

ENT

P21 10:19 Store?

If the result of your calculation is to be used, the point must be stored in an Area file. Answer the question with Yes (ENT).

Note ! 
YES

See next page.

Note ! If no instrument height was given (see page 4.3.43) and the instrument point elevation was calculated, the question Store? will not appear. However, the instrument will retain the elevation data until it is switched off. 4.3.46

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 21 - Z/IZ

From previous page.

PRG 21

How to use

P21 10:20 Area =

In this example, we wish to store the elevation coordinates for our station point in the same Area file as the station coordinates for your free station. Select the same Area file in which your free station establishment is stored.

ENT

P21 10:20 Replace Z?

If an elevation already exists for the station point you are given the question "Replace Z?". Press Yes or ENT to store the new Z or press No to keep the old one.

YES

The program now returns to PO and you can select the next program.

Note !  Data stored in the selected Area file.

Area file Pno(Stn)= ELE=

Here are the data stored in the Area file you have selected.

4.3.47

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 22

PROGRAM 22 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT

4.3.48

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 22 PRG

PROGRAM 22 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT

Angle measuring - In general

When using program 22, all you need to do is to locate the targets one time in C1. When all targets are located and stored in your internal or external memory, you are able to 22 select the measuring mode in which you want to work: In general Standard or D-bar mode. Now the instrument's servo motors will do the rest. The instrument will rotate and point directly in CII against the first registered target, you will then make the necessary fine adjustments and registrations by pressing the A/M-key in front. For rotation to CI, depress the A/M key for a couple of seconds. Note that this program can only be used when using the station unit as a total station.

C2 + C1

C2 + C1

Stn

4.3.49

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 22 PRG 22

PROGRAM 22 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT

How to use

STD HA: VA:

P0 13.38 310.8390 98.1720

The Geodimeter is now in program 0 (P0). Choose program 22 - Angle Measurement.

How to use
PRG

The program name "Ang. Meas." is

STD

P22

13.38 seen very briefly on the display followed by request of which Job file you want to store your angle measurements in. Key in, for example, 16......

Job no:

ENT

Note!  See part 2, Memory Units

STD P22 13.38 1: Xmem off 2: Imem off 3: Serial off

2
ENT

Here you select which memory device you wish to store the Job file in by choosing the appropriate number 1 or 2. In this example we will select No. 2: Imem.

STD Stn =

P22

13.38 Key in the Stn. point name / number

e.g 1000. Press ENT.

See next page

4.3.50

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 22 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT

From previous page

PRG 22

STD
How to use

P22

13.38

HT measure?

If heights are to be measured the next question would be IH (instrument height). In this example we will press NO, which means that instrument and signal height is not taken into account.

NO

STD

P22

13.39 Here you have the opportunity to

Pcode ?

choose the numerical value of the Pcode (Pcode is additional software). We will answer NO ...

NO

STD Pno =

P22

13.39 Key in the number of the first target at

which you wish to begin your angle measurement, e.g. 200 ENT...

ENT

STD

P22

13.39 Make a coarse aiming towards the first

target, then press REG......

Aim to point Press REG

REG

See next page

4.3.51

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 22 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT

From previous page

PRG 22

13.39 In this example we will continue to more ?

How to use

measure towards more targets. Press YES.....

YES

STD Pno =

P22

13.39

Key in the second target number e.g., 201 ENT....

ENT

STD

P22

13.39
Make a coarse aiming towards the second target, then press REG......

Aim to point Press REG

REG

See next page

4.3.52

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 22

PROGRAM 22 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT

From previous page

13.39 Repeat the instructions above for your

How to use

more ?

following targets. When all your targets are stored you will answer no to this question. Press NO.....
NO

Select mod 13.39 The program gives you the opportunity to select in which measuring mode you 1 Std. want to work. In this example we will 2 D bar.
select No. 2= D-bar mode....

The instrument starts to rotate to C2 position, aiming at target No. 200.

C2:I

Press

The number of sightings is entirely up to you, the operator, and will depend mainly on the visibility conditions and the type and required accuracy of the survey work. In this example we have chosen to make two sightings in C2. Approach the target from the other in front direction using the motion screws and press A/M...

C2:II

Press

in front

Press

in front

See next page

After pressing A/M the second time, the mean of angular C2 values is stored in the memory of the instrument. The rule when measuring angles in this mode is that the same number of sightings must be made in both C2 and C1. Rotate the instrument to C1 position by depressing the A/M key in front for approx. 2 sec.

4.3.53

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 22 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT

From previous page

PRG 22

How to use

D HA: VA: II:2

P0 13:40 123.9965 102.2230 I:1

Approach the target from the other direction using the motion screws. Press A/M.

A/M

The second C1 angle measurement and indication of completion (i.e., II:2) is very quickly shown on the display.. However, the values now seen on the display are the final mean horizontal and vertical angle values of the mean of the angles measured in both faces. The dH & dV values displayed are the amounts by which the angles have been adjusted i.e., half the sum of the remaining horizontal and vertical collimation and pointing errors. Now it is time to measure the distance. Press A/M or REG if length is not to be measured.

D P0 13:40 HA: 123.9965 VA: 102.2223 dH:05 dV:03

A/M

D HA: VA: SD:

P0 13:40* 123.9965 102.2230 33.114

Distance is continually measured and updated while mean angular values are frozen. To view the HD and VD to the point, press ENT....

ENT

See next page 4.3.54

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 22

PROGRAM 22 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT

From previous page

How to use

D HA: HD: VD:

P0 13:40* 123.9965 To view the N, E and ELE of the point..... 33.095 -1.155
ENT

D N: E: ELE:
Note! 

P0 13:40* 5188.555 2148.186 397.851

To continue, press the REG key and the instrument will aim at the next target in C2 position. Repeat the instructions above. Note ! After the last point your are prompted "Repeat ?" If answering Yes to this question, all points are remeasured.

REG

The following data is stored in the chosen Job file after pressing the REG key.

Job file Stn IH Pno Pcode HA VA SD HAII VAII HAI VAI If measuring heights If Pcode is entered

If distance measurement has be done 0 if no measurement in face 2 0 if no measurement in face 2 0 if no measurement in face 2 D- mode 0 if no measurement in face 2 D- mode

4.3.55

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 23

PROGRAM 23 - SET OUT

4.3.56

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 23 - SET OUT

SetOut - In general
SetOut will allow you to set out points in the field much quicker and will also give you access to an automatic point check and storage routine.

23 PRG 23

In general

SetOut Point Data

Storage of coordinates and heights of known points is carried out with Program 43 - ENTER COORD. Use of Program 43 means manual keying in of the points. Point storage can be carried out either in Geodat or Internal Memory. During the running of programs 20/23, the stored coordinates are recalled from the specified Geodimeter memory device (GMD) and are used for both orientation of the instrument station and calculation of the bearing and horizontal distance to the set out points.

Automatic Check of Set Out Points Position

After having set out the point, you can check its position accuracy relative to the stored point coordinates and height. These deviations are displayed in form of radial and right angle offsets plus height difference. The signs of these deviations corresponds to left and right in relation to the points correct theoretical position. Once the point has been set out i.e. when the offset values are zero or almost zero, P23 allows the deviations dN, dE and dELE to be stored in Geodat or Internal Memory. As a final check, the points present actual coordinates i.e. N, E and ELE can be viewed and compared with the correct theoretical point coordinates and elevation. If you would also like to store these N, E and ELE values, we recommend that you configurate the user defined output table (see page 4.3).

4.3.57

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 23 - SET OUT

How to use
P0 10:16
The instruments station has been established. Select program 23 (SetOut).

23 PRG 23

Temp = 20.0

How to use
PRG 23

ENT

P23 10:17 Job No=_

Key in the number of the Jobfile in which you want to store the set out point data. Then press ENT.

ENT

P23 10:17 1: Xmem off 2: Imem on 3: Serial off

2
ENT

Activate the device you wish for storage of the Job file by choosing the appropriate number 1, 2 or 3.

See next page 4.3.58

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 23 - SET OUT

From previous page.

PRG 23

P23 10:17 Stn=1000

How to use

ENT

This was the Station No. you entered in program 20, Station Establishment. Press ENT. If no station establishment has been made, P23 will automatically propose establishment of a known or free station (P20) when you press ENT. See page 4.3.2

P23 10:17 Area=_

Key in the Area file number in which the set out point coordinates are stored and press ENT.

ENT

P23 10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

Note!  Signal height

Choose what type of device in which the points are stored. If heights are to be set out, next question would be SH=.

P23 Pcode=_
ENT

10:17

If you have entered a Pcode for the set out point you can enter the desired Pcode here. The program will then seek for the point with that Pcode. If you have no Pcode just leave the line blank and press ENT.

See next page. 4.3.59

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 23 - SET OUT

From previous page.

PRG 23

P23 Pno=1

10:17

How to use

The program suggests the first point in the Areafile. Accept it or key in the point number at which you wish to begin with your setting out task. In this example we key in 206. Note! If you have more than one point in the Areafile to set out the program will automatically suggest the next point.

Note! 

206

ENT

Pno ok? N=975.000 E=1025 ELE=4.098

YES

Check the coordinates and answer YES to accept them or NO.

The instrument now automatically switches to the TRK-mode. The instrument should be rotated to the right + 70.000 degrees. -=Left +=Right Here follows the count down to zero angle method. See page 4.3.63 for the radial/right angle method.
N HA=50 dHA=70 Set out point Trial point

Note!  If you have servo you can rotate the instrument by pressing the key

TRK HA: dHA:

P23 10:17 50.000 70.000

See next page

Reference object

Instrument point

4.3.60

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 23

PROGRAM 23 - SET OUT

From previous page.

Countdown to zero method

How to use

TRK P23 10:17 HA:120.0000 dHA:0.0000

When the instrument displays dHA approx. 0.0000 it is pointing in the direction of the point to set out. HA is the calculated bearing to the set out point.

TRK P23 10:17 dHA:0.0000 dHD:2.75 dHT:0.155

Note!  Measurement tip

As soon as the prism comes within the measurement beam you will see dHD=remaining. In this case the prism is on line but the distance has to be increased by 2.75m. Measurement tip! It is convenient to decrease the number of decimals in the Label 77=dHA. This can be done via menu 13.

TRK P23 10:17 dHA:0.0000 dHD:0.00 dHT:0.000

The point is now set out. Press ENT to check the points coordinates and deviations to the theoretical set out point. Switch to STD or D-bar mode to check the point more accurately.

See next page Note - Rotate the instrument with servo! If you press without measured distance ELE=the height at the theoretical set out point. If you press with measured distance ELE=the height at the measured set out point. If you press longer than 1 sec. with measured distance ELE=the height at the theoretical set out point.

4.3.61

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Definition of dELE and dHT
PRG 23

PROGRAM 23 - SET OUT

How to use

From previous page

+dELE

-dHT Set out point

TRK P23 10:18 Radofs:0.00 RT.ofs:0.00 dHT:0.000

Note!  Skip point

-dELE

+dHT

ENT

TRK P23 10:18 dN:0.00 dE:0.00 dELE:0.000

ENT

When the radial offset, right angle offset and dHT are 0.00, the correct lateral set out position and height have been set out. Note - skip point ! If you have difficulties to set out the point, the program will give you a opportunity to skip it. Turn the instrument away from the prism when HA and dHA are displayed and press Reg. The question "Skip Point?" will be displayed. Answer YES to this question and the program will continue with the next setting out point. When you press REG, these are the three values which are stored in the memory, i.e. deviations from the correct set out point coordinates. Press REG to record deviations or ENT to see coord. of the set out point. In this example we press ENT.

TRK P23 10:18 N:975.000 E:1025 ELE:4.098

REG

These are the actual coordinates of the set out points present position. Press REG to store the deviations. The program continues with the next set out point. Press the PRG-key and 0 to exit to theodolite mode.

Next set out point 4.3.62

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 23 - SET OUT

From page 4.3.60

PRG 23

Radial/Right angle offset method

Aim the instrument towards the prism bearer.

How to use

TRK P23 10:18 HA: 50.000 dHA: 100.000

TRK P23 10:18 dHA: 100.000 dHD: 2.75 dHT:0.155

ENT

When the prism comes within the measurement beam you will see dHD=remaining. Press ENT to see the values for radial and right angle offsets.

TRK P23 10:18 Radofs: 2.00 RT.ofs: -3.00 dHT: 0.155

In this case the prism should be moved 3 meters towards the instrument and 2 meters to the left. The instrument should also be tilted up 0.155 meters.

TRK P23 10:18 Radofs:0.00 RT.ofs:0.00 dHT:0.000

When the radial offset, right angle offset and dHT are 0.00, the correct lateral set out position and height have been set out.

See next page

Reference object

Trial point RT.ofs

Rad.ofs Instrument point Set out point

4.3.63

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 23 - SET OUT

From previous page

PRG 23

How to use

TRK P23 10:18 dN:0.00 dE:0.00 dELE:0.000

ENT

When you press REG, these are the three values which are stored in the Imem, i.e. deviations from the correct set out point coordinates. Press REG to record deviations or ENT to see coord. of the set out point. In this example we press ENT.

TRK P23 10:18 N:975.00 E:1025.00 ELE:4.098

REG

These are the actual coordinates of the set out points present position. Press REG to store the deviations. The program continues with the next set out point. Press the PRGkey and 0 to exit to theodolite mode.

Note!  Skip point

Next set out point

Note - skip point ! If you have difficulties to set out the point, the program will give you a opportunity to skip it. Turn the instrument away from the prism when HA and dHA are displayed and press Reg. The question "Skip Point?" will be displayed. Answer YES to this question and the program will continue with the next setting out point.

4.3.64

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 24

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

B A D

4.3.65

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

In general

RefLine is a program with many applications in the field. The idea is to measure markings along, or parallel to, a predetermined line. If, for example, you have two points 24 whose coordinates are known, you can use this program to In general place any number of points along the line or, at a specified distance, parallell to it. It does not matter whether you have visibility between the points or not. Nor does it matter if you go beyond the lines end points. The program will maintain the direction of the line independent of distance. The program can be used for a variety of applications in the field for example, setting out for pipelines or electric power lines, constructing facade walls on profiles, for drainage ditches, along roadways, etc. RefLine (P24) also contains P20 (Station Establishment) and P43 (Enter Coordinates). Program 20 Station Establishment Program 24 RefLine
Fig. 1 Programs included in Refline.

24 PRG

Program 43 Enter Coordinates

The program is divided into two different parts: Known or Unknown line You can enter the coordinates for the reference line if they are known or construct a reference line by measuring two points. In the first case it is necessary to have established the station before using the program otherwise the program will automatically propose station establishment, P20. In the second case it is not necessary to have established the station since the program will create a new coordinate system with origo in the first point in the reference line.
4.3.66

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 24 PRG 24

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

How to use
N A Reference Line B (0,0,0) E Known Line (0,0,0) A Reference Line B N E Unknown Line

How to use

Measure or SetOut In the second part you can choose between measure and set out points from the reference line.

P0
PRG 24 ENT

Select program 24 (RefLine).

P24 10:16 Job no =

Key in the number or name of the Job file in which you wish to store data about your reference line. A list of data stored in the selected Job file can be seen on page 4.3.83.

ENT

P24 10:16 1. Xmem off 2. Imem on 3. Serial off

2
ENT

Choose in which memory unit you wish to store your Job file. Activate/ deactivate a memory unit by pressing its corresponding key number and ENT. In this example we choose 2, Imem.

See next page. 4.3.67

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

From previous page

PRG 24

Known line

P24 10:16 1 Known Line 2 Unknown Line

Choose 1 if you have already stored the coordinates for the points in the reference line or choose 2 to measure them. In this example we choose 1 since we already have stored the points. See page 4.3.69 for instructions of how to measure the reference line. Is 1 your station? If no station establishment has been made, P24 will automatically propose establishment of a known or free station (that is, P20, StnEst) when you press ENT. In this example, we will continue by accepting the suggested station. Press ENT.

P24 10:16 Stn =1

ENT

P24 10:17 Area =

Key in the name of the Area file in which we have stored the points whose coordinates are known, which we shall be using to establish our reference line.

ENT

Sel device10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

In which memory unit is the Area file stored? In this example we are using the internal memory (Imem).

2 See next page 4.3.68

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 24

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

From previous page Key in the point number for point A on your reference line. Point A=Pno 100. If you have chosen to include heights in your station establishment and ELE is missing for the point the following display appears and you must enter the elevation manually:
Z not found ELE=_

Known line Note!  If ELE is missing you can enter it manually.

P24 10:17 Ref.line point A Pno =

100

ENT

Pno ok ? N=61825.772 E=21807.023 ELE=20.768

ENT

Are your coordinates correct? Press ENT to accept them. If they have to be changed, press NO and use Edit or P43 (Enter Coordinates). We will continue by accepting them.

Note!  If ELE is missing you can enter it manually.

P24 10:17 Ref.line point B Pno =

101 ENT

Key in the point number for point B on your reference line. Point B = Pno 101.

Pno ok ? N=61814.748 E=21817.195 ELE=21.890

ENT

Are your coordinates correct? Press ENT to accept them. If they have to be changed, press NO and use Edit or P43 (Enter Coordinates). We will continue by accepting them.

See page 4.3.67 4.3.69

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

P0 and memory procedure

PRG 24

Unknown line

P24 10:17 1 Known Line 2 Unknown Line

In this example we choose 2 since we want to measure two points and use them as reference line.

P24 10:17 HT measure ?

Are you going to measure heights? If you decide not to measure heights it means that the instrument height (IH) and signal height (SH) will be ignored. In this example we choose to measure heights. Press YES or ENT.

YES

STD IH=

P24 10:17
Enter the instrument height and press ENT.

ENT

P24 10:17 Key in the point number for point A Ref.line point A on your reference line. Point A=Pno 200. Pno=

200

ENT

See next page 4.3.70

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

From previous page

PRG 24

P24 10:17 SH=

Unknown line

Enter the signal height and press ENT.

ENT

STD HA: VA:

P24 10:17 165.2355 106.5505

Aim at the first point, pnt A and press A/M to start measurement.

A/M

STD HA: VA: SD:

P24 10:17 165.2350 107.0020 37.225

When you are ready press REG to store the point.

REG

STD P24 10:17 Ref.line point B Key in the point number for point B on your reference line. Point B=Pno Pno=
201.

201

ENT

See next page 4.3.71

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

From previous page

PRG 24

P24 10:17
Unknown line

SH=

Enter the signal height and press ENT.

ENT

STD HA: VA:

P24 10:17 200.0056 102.1095

Aim at the second point, pnt B, and press A/M to start measurement.

A/M

STD HA: VA: SD:

P24 10:17 201.0001 102.1096 12.0022

REG

When you are ready press REG to store the point.

See next page

4.3.72

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 24

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

Measure

P24 10:18 1 Meas 2 Setout 3 Exit

1

Choose whether you wish to measure or set out points relative your reference line. You can also exit from the program with 3. In this case we choose to measure points. Press 1. See page 4.3.76 for setout instructions.

P24 10:18 Slope=-98.90740

ENT

P24 10:18 SH=

The program has calculated a slope for the reference line with help of the points A and B. The slope is defined as (per thousand). Accept it or key in a new slope. The slope of the line is expressed as a negative figure per thousand from point A for a downward slope, and as a positive figure for an upward slope. In the case of a slope, dELE is the deviation from the theoretical elevation of the point. Enter the signal height.

0.7

ENT

STD HA: VA:

P24 10:18 36.5110 102.8955

Aim at the first point and press A/M to start measurement. Note! You can also change to another measurement mode at this point (TRK or D-bar).

A/M

See next page. 4.3.73

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

From previous page

PRG 24

Measure

STD P24 10:18 Radofs: 10.010 RT.ofs: 2.010 dELE:0.002

REG

Radofs is a definition of how far your measured point lies from point A. RT.ofs is defined as the right-angle distance from reference line AB. dELE is the difference in height from point A. If you have defined a slope as a (per thousand), dELE is calculated as the deviation from the theoretical point. See fig. 2 for offset definitions.

See next page

-Radofs -RT.ofs A +RT.ofs

+Radofs

Reference Line

dELE Measured pnt. Radofs RT.ofs

Fig. 2 Offset definitions measuring mode

4.3.74

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

From previous page

PRG 24

Measure

P24 10:18 Pno=

ENT

What name/number will you give your new control point? Key in the name and ENT to store Pno, Radofs, RT.ofs, and the coordinates, in the Job file you have chosen in Imem.The program will automatically increment the point number when you continue with the next point. See page 4.3.83 for a list of what is stored in after registration. Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the measured point. The numerical value you enter corresponds to an alpha title which you enter with Program 45, Pcode. If you leave the line blank no Pcode will be stored and the question will not appear for the next point. Do you wish to measure more points press YES or ENT, otherwise press NO to step to the mode menu.

P24 10:18 Pcode=

ENT

P24 10:18 Continue ?

YES

NO

STD HA: VA:

P24 10:18 33.0092 100.0033

4.3.75

P24 10:18 1 Measure 2 Setout 3 Exit

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 24

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

Setout with Radofs/ RT.ofs

P24 10:18 1 Meas 2 Setout 3 Exit

2

Choose whether you wish to measure or set out points relative your reference line. You can also exit from the program with 3. In this case we choose to setout points. Press 2.

P24 10:18 1 Radofs/Rt.ofs 2 Coord

This menu will only appear if you have a known reference line. Choose 1 to set out with Radofs and Rt.ofs. See page 4.3.80 for instructions of how to set out with coordinates.

P24 10:18
Enter the signal height.

SH=

0.7

ENT

P24 10:18 Pno=

Enter a number for the first point you wish to set out. The program will automatically increment the point number when you continue with the next point.

ENT

P24 Pcode=
ENT

Here you have the opportunity to 10:18 choose a Pcode for the measured point. The numerical value you enter corresponds to an alpha title which you enter with Program 45, Pcode. If you leave the line blank no Pcode will be stored and the question will not appear for the next point. 4.3.76

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

From the previous page

PRG 24

P24 10:18 Radofs=

ENT

Setout with Radofs/ RT.ofs

Enter the radial offset to the set out point. See fig. 3.

P24 10:18 Rt.ofs=

ENT

Enter the right angle offset to the set out point. See fig. 3.

P24 10:18 SHT=

Enter the height for the set out point.

ENT

TRK P24 10:18 dHA: 0.0000 dHD: 0.00 dHT: 0.000

-Radofs See next page

The instrument switches to TRKmode. When dHA 0.0000 the instrument is pointing in the direction of the set out point. As soon as the prism comes within the measurement beam you will see dHD =remaining. Press ENT to see the values for radial and right angle off-sets or press REG to registrate the point. +Radofs Set Out Point -RT.ofs

Reference Line

B +RT.ofs

Fig. 3 Offset definitions set out with Radofs/RT.ofs

4.3.77

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

From the previous page

PRG ENT 24

Set out with Radofs/ RT.ofs

TRK P24 10:18 Radofs:0.00 RT.ofs:0.00 dHT:0.000

ENT

When the radial offset, right angle offset and dHT are 0.00, the correct lateral set out point position and height have been set out. See fig. 4 for offset definitions.

TRK P24 10:18 dN:0.00 dE:0.00 dELE:0.000

ENT

Press REG to register the set out deviations, see fig. 4, or press ENT to see the coordinates of the set out point.

See next page

-RT.ofs -Radofs Stored Radofs Stored RT.ofs +Radofs A Reference Line Instrument B Set Out Point +RT.ofs

Fig.4 Offset definitions setout mode

4.3.78

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

From the previous page

PRG 24

Set out with Radofs/ RT.ofs

TRK P24 10:18 N:61900.00 E:21447.22 ELE:7.890

These are the actual coordinates of the set out point's position. Press REG to store the deviations. See page 4.3.83 to see a list of what is stored in the memory.

REG

P24 10:18 Continue ?

Do you wish to set out more points press YES. Press NO to exit to the mode menu.

YES

NO

P24 10:18 Pno=

P24 10:18 1 Measure 2 Setout 3 Exit

4.3.79

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 24

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

Setout with coordinates

P24 10:18 1 Meas 2 Setout 3 Exit

2

In this case we are going to set out point with known coordinates. This is only possible if we have a known reference line.

P24 10:18 1 Radofs/Rt.ofs 2 Coord

Choose 2 to set out points with known coordinates. This section is similar to Program 23, SetOut. (This option is not available for the unknown line).

P24 10:18 SH=

Enter the signal height.

0.7

ENT

P24 10:18 Pcode=

ENT

If you have entered a Pcode for the set out point you can enter the desired Pcode here. The program will then seek for the point with this Pcode. If you don't have any Pcode just leave the line blank and press ENT. If you leave it blank this question will not appear for the next point.

See next page 4.3.80

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

From the previous page

PRG 24

P24 10:18 Pno=

Setout with coordinates

The program suggests the first point in the Areafile. Accept it or key a new.

ENT

Pno ok? N=61870.890 E=21980.300 ELE=4.098

ENT

Check the coordinates and answer YES to accept them or NO.

TRK P24 10:18 dHA:0.0000 dHD:0.00 dHT:0.000

ENT

When dHA 0.0000 the instrument is pointing in the direction of the set out point. As soon as the prism comes within the measurement beam you will see dHD=remaining. Press ENT to see the values for radial and right angle offsets or press REG to registrate the point.

TRK P24 10:18 Radofs:0.00 RT.ofs:0.00 dHT:0.000

When the radial offset, right angle offset and dHT are 0.00, the correct lateral set out point position and height have been set out. See page 4.3.78, fig.4, for the definitions of radial and right angle offsets.

See next page 4.3.81

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

From the previous page

PRG 24

Set out with coordinates

TRK P24 10:18 dN:0.00 dE:0.00 dELE:0.000

ENT

When you press the REG key, these are the three values which are stored in the memory, i.e. deviations from the correct set out point coordinates. Press REG to register the deviations or press ENT to see coordinates of the set out point.

TRK P24 10:18 N:61870.89 E:21980.30 ELE:4.098

REG

These are the actual coordinates of the set out point's position. Press REG to store the deviations. See page 4.3.83 for a list of what is stored in the memory.

STD

P24 10:18

Continue ?

Do you wish to set out more points press YES. Press NO to exit to the mode menu.

YES

NO

STD Pno=

P24 10:18

P24 10:18 1 Measure 2 Setout 3 Exit

4.3.82

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 24

PROGRAM 24 - REFLINE

The list below shows which data will be stored after registration. Job file in Imem Comments Station establishment

Registered data

Stn Coord. RefObj. Coord. HAref HD IH Pno1 (A). Coord* Pno2 (B). Coord* Slope

Distance to ref. obj. (known stn.)

Coordinates for the reference line Stored only in measure mode Measure mode

Pno 1. SH Coord. Radofs RT.ofs dELE

Measured data, control points

Setout mode with Radofs/RT.ofs Pno Radofs RT.ofs dELE Setout data, control points

Setout mode with coordinates Pno dN dE dELE Setout data, control points Coordinate deviations

* Stored only if using a known reference line Relative the reference line

4.3.83

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 25

PROGRAM 25 - AREA CALCULATION

4.3.84

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 25 PRG 25

PROGRAM 25 - AREA CALCULATION

Area Calculation - In general

With program 25 you are able to calculate the area and the volume between measured points. The program contains three main functions: 1. Calc With this function you can calculate the area between measured points in the order they are registered.
P2 P3 P1

In general

P4

2. Arrange list With this function you can arrange a list of measured points and calculate the area between the points in the order they are arranged in the list.

P2 P3 P1

P4

3. Volume With this function you can enter a height for the calculated area and P1 calculate the volume.

P2 P3 HT

P4

4.3.85

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 25 PRG 25

PROGRAM 25 - AREA CALCULATION

How to use
STD P0 13:38 HA: 310.8390 VA: 98.1720
The Geodimeter is now in program 0 (P0). Choose program 25 - Area Calc.

How to use - Calc.

PRG

25

P25 13:38 1 Calc 2 Arrange list

Here can choose if you want to calculate the area in the order the points are measured (1 Calc) or if you want to arrange the points in a different order and calculate that area. Here we choose 1 Calc.

P25 Job no=_

13:38

Key in the Job file in which the measured points are stored and press ENT.

ENT

Sel.device 13:38 In which memory unit is the Job file 1 Xmem located. In this example it is in the 2 Imem internal memory. Press 2.
Note !

See next page

Note! If Info 32 appears it may be that the Job file you have keyed in does not exist in the chosen memory unit or if you are using an external memory that the connections are bad. If Info 44 appears it may be that the Job file does not contain right point data. 4.3.86

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 25 - AREA CALCULATION

From previous page

PRG 25

P25
How to use - Calc.

13.38

SqrAre=3163.50

Here is the calculated area. Press enter to continue.

ENT

P25 volume?

13.39

Do you want to calculate a volume. Press YES to accept or NO to cancel. In this case we accept with YES.

YES

P25 HT=

13.39

Key in the height of the volume. In this case we key in 10 and press ENT.

ENT

P25

13.39
Here is the calculated volume.

volume=-218281.5 Press ENT to exit the program.

ENT

4.3.87

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 25

PROGRAM 25 - AREA CALCULATION

How to use Arrange list

STD P0 13.38 HA: 310.8390 VA: 98.1720

The Geodimeter is now in program 0 (P0). Choose program 25 - Area Calc.

PRG

25

Here can choose if you want to

P25 13.38 calculate the area in the order the 1 Calc points are measured (1 Calc) or if you 2 Arrange list want to arrange the points in a different order and calculate that area. Here we choose 2 Arrange list. 2

P25 Job no=_

13.38 Key in the Job file in which the

measured points are stored and press ENT.

ENT

Sel.device 13.38 In which memory unit is the Job file 1 Xmem located. In this example it is in the 2 Imem internal memory. Press 2.
Note !

See next page

Note! If Info 32 appears it may be that the Job file you have keyed in does not exist in the chosen memory unit or if you are using an external memory that the connections are bad. If Info 44 appears it may be that the Job file does not contain right point data. 4.3.88

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 25 - AREA CALCULATION

From previous page

PRG 25

13:38
How to use Arrange list

Pno=1

Key in the first point no in the area. The point must exist in your Job file. In this case we key in 1 and press ENT.

Pno ok? N=10 E=20 ELE=30

YES

Here is the point coordinates displayed. Accept the point with YES or cancel with NO. Here we accept the point.

13.39 Pno=1

Key in the second point in the area. In this case we key in point no 4.

Pno ok? N=14 E=15 ELE=16

YES

Accept the point coordinates with YES or cancel them with no.

See next page

4.3.89

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 25 - AREA CALCULATION

From previous page

PRG 25

13:39
How to use Arrange list

more?

After having keyed in 3 points you have the chance to calculate the area. Press YES to continue key in more points or press NO to calculate the area.

NO

13:39 SqrAre=9.00

Here is the calculated area. Press ENT to continue.

ENT

13:39 volume?

Do you want to calculate the volume. Press YES to accept or NO to cancel. In this example we press NO.

NO

STD P0 13:39 HA: 45.0009 VA: 120.0984

You are now returned to program 0.

4.3.90

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 26

PROGRAM 26 - DISTOB

4.3.91

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 26 - DISTOB

DistOb - In general

DistOb will allow you to calculate distances between objects even if the line of sight is obstructed. The program calculates the horizontal distance and the difference in height between 26 two points. If the instrument is oriented in a coordinate In general system the true bearing (azimuth) between the two points will be calculated as well.
26 PRG

How do I Work with DistOb This is done simply by choosing the program No 26. Select a Stn.point where you have a free line of sight to the two points between which you would like to measure the distance.
HA 1 HD 2

Angle Station

The result is given in the form of HA=bearing, HD=horizontal distance and DHT=difference in height between these two points.

4.3.92

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 26

PROGRAM 26 - DISTOB

The actual measuring can be made using two different combinations:

In general

Combination 1 HA, HD and DHT are displayed as the measured and calculated result between point 1 to 2, 2 to 3 and so on.
1

Combination 2 HA, HD and DHT are displayed as the measured and calculated result between point 1 to 2, 1 to 3 and so on.
1 2

4.3.93

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 26 - DISTOB

How to use
Switch on the instrument and go through the Start procedure until the instrument is in theodolite mode.

26 PRG 26

How to use 2 Meas

STD P0 10:16 HA=392.9095 VA=102.8955

The instruments station has been established. Select program 26 (DistOb).

PRG

26 ENT

P26 10:17 1 File 2 Meas

2

If you want to measure the distance between two objects choose 2. Meas. If you want to calculate the distance between two points stored in the memory choose 1. File, see page 4.3.98.

P26 10:17 Job No=_

ENT

Key in the number of the Jobfile in which you want to store your bearing distance and height.

See next page

4.3.94

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 26 - DISTOB

From previous page.

PRG 26

How to use 2 Meas

P26 10:17 1:Xmem off 2:Imem on 3:Serial off

2
ENT

You can activate which device you wish for the storage of the Job file by choosing the appropriate number 1, 2 or 3.

P26 10:17 From Pno=

Note! 

Select the first point you want to measure from. Key in e.g. 1 and press ENT. Note! If you select a point that already has been measured in a previous task, this point will not be remeasured.

P26 10:17 SH=

Key in the Signal Height and press ENT.

ENT

STD P26 10:17 HA: 36.5110 VA: 102.8955

The instrument is in theodolite mode. Aim to the first point and press the A/M key.

A/M

See next page. 4.3.95

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 26 - DISTOB

From previous page.

PRG 26

How to use 2 Meas

STD P26 10:17 HA: 36.5110 VA: 102.8955 SD: 247.517

REG

The instrument has now measured angle and distance to Pno=1. The values are ready for registration. Press REG.

STD P26 10:17 To Pno=1_

The program remembers the latest measured point. Choose the second point. Key in 2 and press ENT.

2
ENT

STD SH=

P26 10:17

Key in the signal height. In this example we key in 1.000 and press ENT.

1.000 ENT

STD HA: VA:

P26 10:17 50.1585 104.1620

A/M

The instrument is in theodolite mode. Aim to the second point and press A/ M.

See next page. 4.3.96

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 26 - DISTOB

From previous page.

PRG 26

How to use 2 Meas

STD HA: VA: SD:

P26 10:18 50.1585 104.1620 98.732

REG

The instrument has now measured angle and distance to Pno=2. The values are ready for registration. Press REG.

STD P26 10:18 HA=227.7320 HD=152.443 Press ENT...

ENT

The result is calculated and shown in form of: HA=Horizontal angle (Bearing) HD=Horizontal distance Press ENT to see more.

Store ? DHT=4.784 Grade=8.984

DHT=Difference in height. Grade=Slope between the included points in percent (DHT/HD). Press YES to store the results.

YES

more ? DHT=4.784 Grade=8.984

Do you want to continue press YES. Press NO to exit.

YES

P26 From Pno=2

10:18

You are now able to continue with the next point.

4.3.97

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 26

PROGRAM 26 - DISTOB

P26 10:17 1 File 2 Meas

Choose 1 File

How to use 1 File

P26 10:17 Job no=_

Key in the number of the Jobfile in which you want to store your bearing distance and height.

ENT

P26 10:17 1:Xmem off 2:Imem off 3:Serial off

2
ENT

In which memory device do you want to store your Jobfile. Press ENT.

P26 10:17 Area=_

In which Areafile are your point coordinates stored. Key in the number press ENT. Note - The points must have an elevation.

Sel devic 10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

In which memory device is the Areafile stored.

4.3.98

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 26

PROGRAM 26 - DISTOB

How to use 1 File

P26 10:17 From Pno=1_

1

Select the first point in the calculation. Key in e.g. 1 and press ENT.

P26 10:17 To Pno=2_

2

Select the second in the calculation. Key in e.g 2 and press ENT.

P26 10:17 HA=200.0000 HD=2.000 Press ENT ...

ENT

The result is calculated and shown in form of: HA=Horizontal angle (Bearing) HD=Horizontal distance Press ENT to see more.

Store? DHT=2.000 Grade=100.000

DHT=Difference in height. Grade=Slope between the included points in percent (DHT/HD). Press YES to store the results.

YES

more ? DHT=2.000 Grade=100.000

NO

Do you want to continue press YES. Press NO to exit to P0.

P0

4.3.99

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 28

PROGRAM 28 - OBSTRUCTED POINT

4.3.100

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 28 - OBSTRUCTED POINT

In general

Obstructed Point is a program which will help you to measure towards obstructed points. The method simplifies the measuring task since the range 28 pole does not have to be held in a levelled position. In general Mount two prisms on a range pole. Locate the pole on the difficult point and measure towards each prism. The program will then calculate the position of the difficult point. To get the best result locate the prism B as close as possible to the obstructed point, C. The highest accuracy of the measurement is also achieved if the distance between prism A and B, dist AB, is as large as possible. See fig 1.

28 PRG

B dist AB Unknown point (C) dist BC

Fig. 1 Distance definitions.

4.3.101

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 28 PRG 28

PROGRAM 28 - OBSTRUCTED POINT

How to use
Mount two prisms on a range pole and note the distance BC, see fig.1 on page 4.3.101. The distance between the two prisms will be calculated and does not have to be entered. Locate the pole on the obstructed point (it is not necessary to hold the pole in a levelled position). Startup the instrument and follow the instructions below.
P0
PRG 28 ENT

How to use

Select program 28 (Obstructed Point).

P28 10:16 Job no =

Key in the number or name of the Job file in which you wish to store data about your measurements. A list of data stored in the selected Job file can be seen on page 4.3.106.

ENT

P28 10:16 1. Xmem off 2. Imem off 3. Serial off

2
ENT

Choose in which memory unit you wish to store your Job file. Activate/ deactivate a memory unit by pressing its corresponding key number and ENT. In this example we choose 2, Imem.

P28 10:16 Prism=

Enter the prism offset and press ENT.

ENT

See next page 4.3.102

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 28 - OBSTRUCTED POINT

P28 10:16
28

dist BC=
Obstructed Point
ENT

Enter the distance BC, that is the distance between prism B and the obstructed point C. See page 4.3.101 fig. 1.

P28 10:16 Pno=

Enter a point number for the point to be measured and press ENT.

ENT

P28 10:16 Pcode=

ENT

Here you have an opportunity to enter a Pcode for the point. The program will propose the last Pcode entered. Accept it, key in a new or leave it blank for no Pcode. If you leave it blank this question will not appear for the next point.

P28 10:16
Note!

meas A

Start with measuring towards the first prism, A, and press ENT. Note ! If you have a signal from the prism you can start the measurement at this point by pressing A/M.

ENT

STD HA: VA:

A/M

P28 10:17 355.8192 95.2208

Aim towards the first prism, A, and press the A/M-key to start measurement.

4.3.103

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 28 - OBSTRUCTED POINT

From previous page

PRG 28

Obstructed Point

STD HA: VA: SD:

P28 10:17 356.6407 95.2208 3.456

REG

Press REG to registrate the first measurement.

P28 10:17
Note!

meas B

Continue with measuring towards the second prism, B and press ENT. Note ! If you have a signal from the prism you can start the measurement at this point by pressing A/M.

ENT

STD HA: VA:

P28 10:17 Aim towards the second prism, B, and 355.8192 press the A/M-key to start 94.1760 measurement.

A/M

STD HA: VA: SD:

P28 10:17 355.8193 Press REG to registrate the second 94.1800 measurement. 3.586
REG

See next page 4.3.104

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 28 - OBSTRUCTED POINT

From the previous page

PRG 28

Obstructed Point Note! Press CL to skip the point

STD N: E: ELE:

P28 10:17 2890.987 1098.879 222.098

ENT

These are the coordinates for the obstructed point. Press ENT to see more data for the point or press REG to store the point and continue with a new measurement. Note - Skip point If you press CL the following display appear and you are able to skip the point and continue with a new point: STD P28 10:17

Skip point? HA=Horizontal Angle (Bearing) HD=Horizontal Distance Press ENT to see more or press REG to store the point and continue with a new measurement. Note - Skip point Press CL to skip the point and continue with a new point.

STD HA: HD:

Note! Press CL to skip the point

P28 10:17 354.1908 96.0008

ENT

STD P28 10:17 DHT=4.784 Grade=8.984

DHT=Difference in height between the obstructed point and the instrument. Grade=Slope between the obstructed point and the instrument in percent. Press ENT to see the coordinates for the point or press REG to store the point and continue with a new measurement. Note - Skip point Press CL to skip the point and continue with a new point.

REG

Note! Press CL to skip the point

See the next page 4.3.105

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 28

PROGRAM 28 - OBSTRUCTED POINT

From the previous page

P28 10:17
Registered data

Pno=

The program automatically increments the point number. Accept it, enter a new value or press CL to exit to program 0.

CL

P0

Job file in Imem Prism offset distance BC User defined data, pnt A User defined data, pnt B Activity code

Comments Stored before the first measurement

Calculated data follows

Data for the obstructed point (C) Pno Pcode N E ELE HA HD DHT Grade

Stored if it has been entered

Fig. 2. List of data stored in the selected Jobfile.

4.3.106

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

4.3.107

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29 PRG

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

RoadLine - In general

RoadLine is a program for setting out road/rail lines. It is easy to use and contains routines for registering section interval, centre offsets, section (="chainage" in some 29 countries or "station" in USA), coordinates and different In general types of road/rail elements. The program also contains check/ control function which ensures that the stored element parameters are correct. Two methods can be used while setting out; 1. Conventional radial setting out and 2. Orthogonal or rectangular setting out. At key in of section interval (longitudal section) and optional centreline offset (-=Left, +=Right), the program automatically converts the setting out point coordinate values to setting out data i.e. Horizontal distance and Bearing. The program covers intergrated use of following programs:

RoadLine P29

Enter Coordinates P43

Station Establishment P20

4.3.108

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

Structure
Roadline comprises 4 main functions: 1. Store For registration of the start and end coordinates of the different elements. 2. Check For mathematical check of the stored element coordinates and parameters. 3. Set Out For setting out points along roadline both centreline and offset, plus station establishment (Known or Free Station). 4. Measure For measuring in existing roadline elements, both centreline and offset, and objects that may lie along the roadline.

In general

Store
With this function in the RoadLine program you store all roadline data, i.e. section interval, centre line offset, section, start and end coordinates of the different roadline elements and type of element. A roadline can contain 3 types of elements: t t t Straight Circular Arc Transition

Roadline data is stored in the form of section, start and end points of the element and the type of element, i.e. straight, arc or transition. This data is then either stored in the internal memory of the instrument or in Geodat.
4.3.109

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

When storing circular arc and transition elements, radius and A-parameter must also be stored. While storing transition curves instead of keying in the A-parameter, the option to 29 store Radius and length is open (A= R x L). In this case, at In general the prompt "Radius", key in the RxL factor, at the prompt "Length" key in -1 or 1 which is the direction of the curve (=Left, no sign=Right). When storing roadline data, you must ensure that the following combinations do not occur in the data produced by your roaddesign program: t t t t Transition - Transition - Transition Straight - Transition - Transition Transition - Transition - Straight Straight - Transition - Straight

In order to overcome the problems concerning the mathematical solutions of any of the above combinations, they can be overcome by defining a radius at the different elements connecting points, i.e. by defining a straight or arc element and placing it between the elements in question. These "pseudo elements" need only have a longitudal length of a few millimetres, which will not effect the accuracy of the eventual setting out of the points which lie along those elements. In the case of the first combination, store it with this combination instead: t Transition - Straight - Transition - Straight- Transition

4.3.110

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

Check
This function mathematically checks the stored coordinates and curve parameters of the different elements after registration of the data in an Area file. All errors in excess of 20mm are displayed and the element in which they are. Errors which occur due to wrongly keyed in In-Data can be easily rectified with the help of Edit (MNU 2). Note - error A detected error can depend on either keyin in errors or incorrect design of the roadline.

Note ! 

Set Out
Before any setting out task can be commenced, it is necessary of course to inform the Geodimeter of the position at which the instrument is set up. Program 29 contains Station establishment. Setting out task After establishment and orientation of your survey station, registration of section interval and centre line offset is carried out (if it has not already been done with the STORE, option file). Directly thereafter the setting out data in the form of horizontal bearing and horizontal distance to the setting out point are calculated. If cross section data is available for each or some sections, 3 dimensional setting out of cross sections can be executed. In this case questions regarding (HT_measure?) in the station establishment program must be answered with YES.

Measure
The option Measure enables the operator to localize the section and centre line relative to a stored roadline. You simply measure an arbitrary point and the program calculates the section/centre line offset and coordinates of the point. This part of the program is especially suitable for cross-sectioning or localizing an obstacle when checking a planned section of road.
4.3.111

PRG

29

Stn.Point = 50 N =13750 E =21450

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Ref.Object = 51 N = 13900 E = 21800

7 6
2232.858 2387.144

8
2712.663

4 3
1256.031 Ref.Object Stn.Point 1425.793 1339.365

4.3.112

399.990

770.023

816.690

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

Roadline example
This table is used in the following examples.

Roadline example

Element Section no.

Northing

Easting

Type

Radius /A-par.

399.990 13751,63 20872,790 1 770.023 13766,681 21241,440 2 816.690 13775,341 21287,294 3 1256.031 13892,688 21710,267 4 1339.365 13921,506 21788,458 5 1425.793 13951,437 21869,538 6 2232.858 14135,099 22653,592 7 2387.144 14145,571 22807,429 8 2712.663 14079,093 23123,798 9 2825.163 14029,418 23224,709 10 2937.663 13979,743 23325,621 11 3175.785 13918,354 23554,785 12 3288.285 13910,932 23667,015 13 3297.592 13910,536 23676,313 straight clothoid -300 circle -800 clothoid -300 clothoid +300 circle +800 clothoid +400 circle +3500 clothoid +550 clothoid -500 circle -3000 clothoid -350 circle -1400

4.3.113

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29 PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

How to use
Before beginning to use RoadLine in the field we recommend that you run through the program in the office. Switch on the instrument, and disengage the dual-axis compensator with function 22 and step through program 0 by pressing only ENT until you place Geodimeter in the theodolite mode.

How to use Store

P29 - 1. Store STD P0 10:16 HA=392.9095 VA=102.8955

The instruments station has been established. Select program 29 (RoadLine).

PRG ENT

29

Roadline 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

ENT

10:17

Now you can choose between the four main functions. Let us start to store roadline data. Press 1.

Roadline 10:17 4 Measure

1 4.3.114

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

From previous page.

PRG 29

How to use Store

Store 10:17 1 Roadline 2 Sect/Offset

At this stage you are able to select if you want to store the Section incrementation and Offset, but this can also be done in Setout*. Let us select Roadline. Press 1. *Note! In this case the offset and incrementation values will not be saved when you exit the program.

Note! 

Sel.device10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

This is a display of the memory devices available. Let us select in which device we shall store our roadline data e.g. Imem (Internal Memory). Press 2.

P29 10:17 Area=_

Key in the name of the Area file in which you wish to store the Section No., Coordinates and type of elements and press ENT.

ENT

Clothoid 10:17 1 A-param 2 Radius/Length

1 See next page.

This is a switch key, you can choose if you want to store A-param or if you want to store Radius and Length. In this case we choose 1.

4.3.115

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

From previous page.

PRG 29

P29 10:17 Sect.=0.000_

How to use Store

Key in the first Section No. for the roadline. In this example we key in 399.990 and ENT.

ENT

P29 10:17 Sect.=399.990 N=

Key in the Northing value of section No. 399.990. In this example it is 13751.63.

ENT

P29 10:17 Sect.=399.990 E=

Key in the Easting value of section No. 399.990. In this example it is 20872.790.

ENT

P29 10:17 Sect.=399.990 Straight?

YES

Select type of roadline element, Straight, Arc or Roadline end by pressing NO until the correct element type is displayed. Accept the type by answering YES. In this example we choose ARC.

See next page. 4.3.116

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

From previous page.

PRG 29

How to use Store

P29

10:19

Sect.=399.990 Radius=
ENT

Key in the radial dimension, in our example -1400. After you have pressed ENT, a beep signal will be heard. The roadline data for section 399.990 are now stored in Area file 100.

P29

10:19

Sect.=0.000_

Key in the next section point and repeat the above instructions. In this example we key in 770.023 and ENT.

ENT

P29

10:19

Sect.=3297.592 Straight?
Note!  You must end the roadline with a Straight line.
YES

When you are selecting the last roadline element, select Roadline end. Roadline end=YES, means that the last element will be stored as a straight line. Note! The last element must be a straight line.

STD P0 10:19 HA: 266.9930 VA: 110.1425

You are now returned to the program P0.

4.3.117

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

How to use Check

You have now stored all roadline data in Area file 100, the stored data are; the different types of roadline elements, section no. and coordinates. Now its time to check the keying in and geometrical solutions of the different roadline elements with the help of function CHECK.

P29 - 2. Check STD P0 10:19 HA=392.9095 VA=102.8955

Choose program 29.

PRG ENT

29

Roadline 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

2

10:19

Let us select the control function CHECK. Press 2.

Sel.device10:19 1 Xmem 2 Imem

2

Select in which device roadline data is stored. In this example it is in the internal memory.

See next page

4.3.118

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

From previous page.

PRG 29

P29 10:19 Area=_

How to use Check

Key in the name of the Area file you wish to check.

ENT

P29 10:19
Note ! 

Elem:1 Diff:

ENT

The program check each element stored in Area file. Note - check routine A comparison with the total longitudinal centre line measurement of each individual section is carried out. If the final result gives an error message, one or more elements contain errors in which curve length errors are 20mm. Re-check the roadline and define the element with an error. The element can be changed with EDIT (MNU 2).

STD

P0

10:19
After have gone through CHECK the instrument returns to program P0.

Temp=20.0

4.3.119

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

P29 - 3. Set Out STD P0 10:16 HA=392.9095 VA=102.8955

How to use Set Out

Choose program 29.

PRG

29

ENT

Roadline 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

3

10:17

Let us select start the setting out. Press 3.

P29 10:17 Job no=0_

16

Key in the number of the Job file in which you want to store the set out point coordinate deviations.

See next page

Storage of Control Data The coordinate deviations will represent the differences between stored set out point coordinates and the actual set out point coordinates. This is the basis of the printed out data sheet which will act as proof of having carried out your setting out task to within the contract specified accuracy.
4.3.120

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

How to use Set Out

These dN, dE and dELE deviations are also much easier to use than comparing actual set out values with their respective theoretical values. If you dont want to store any control data, clear the suggested Job no, and press ENT. Control data that will be stored are: Pno=Section/Offset dN= dE= dELE=

If height measurement is carried out also elevation is stored (staked elevation). If you wish to store other control data you can configurate the user defined output table (see 4.3)
From previous page

P29 10:17 1:Xmem off 2:Imem off 3:RS232 off

2
ENT

Here you can activate which device you wish for storage of the Job file by choosing the appropriate number. Here we choose the internal memory. Press 2 and ENT.

P29 10:17 Stn=1

ENT

See next page

Is "1" your station? As station establishment was done prior to P29, this station will be proposed now. If no station establishment has been made, P29 will automatically propose establishment of a known or free station (that is, P20 Station Establishment) when you press ENT. In this example we will continue by accepting the suggested station. Press ENT. 4.3.121

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

From previous page.

PRG 29

How to use Set Out

Sel.device10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

Choose the type of device in which the roadline data is stored. In this example we have stored the roadline data in Imem Area 100. Press 2.

P29 10:17 Area=_

Key in the Area file number in which the roadline data is stored and press ENT.

ENT

P29 10:17 SecInc=10.000

10

ENT

Here you are able to select which Sec.Inc. you shall have in this roadline example. If you already have stored Sec. Inc. in "STORE", the program selects that value. Let us select Sec.Inc.=10m. Press 10 and ENT.

P29 10:17 cl.ofs=

0

Now you are able to store the centre line offset."0"=centreline.

ENT

See next page. 4.3.122

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

From previous page.

PRG 29

P29 10:17 more ?

How to use Set Out

Answer YES to this question if you have more values to store, in our example -5m, -10m to the left and 5m, 10m to the right. When all offset values are stored answer NO to the question.

NO

P29 10:17 Roadline check Wait !

The program checks that the element combinations, shown on page 4.3.110 do not occur. Wait !

P29 10:17 Sect.=399.990

The program suggests the first section in the Area file, but can easily be changed to any value. In this example we accept the value, press ENT.

ENT

P29 10:17 cl.ofs=0.00

The program is presenting the centreline for the first section, if ok press ENT, otherwise you will have the opportunity to select another offset value. Press ENT.

ENT

See next page. 4.3.123

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

From previous page.

PRG 29

How to use Set Out

P29 10:17 Sect.:399.990 cl.ofs:0.00 ok?

Is the setting out data for the first section ok, press YES. The instrument adopts the TRACKING mode automatically.

YES

Countdown to zero method

TRK P29 10:17 HA:129.8210 dHA:170.3595

The instrument should be rotated to the right +170.3595 degrees. -=Left +=Right This is called the count down to zero angle method. See page 4.3.127 for the radial/right angle method.

TRK P29 10:17 HA:300.2475 dHA:0.0000

When the instrument displays approx. 0.0000 opposite dHA, it is pointing in the direction of the first section point. HA is the calculated bearing to the first section point.

TRK P29 10:17 dHA:0.0000 dHD:2.75 dHT:-0.155

As soon as the prism comes within the measurement beam you will see dHD=remaining. In this case the prism is on line but the distance has to be increased by 2.75m.

See next page. 4.3.124

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

From previous page.

PRG 29

How to use Set Out

TRK P29 10:18 Radofs:0.00 RT.ofs:0.00 dHT:0.000

When the radial offset, right angle offset and dHT are 0.00, the correct lateral set out position and height have been set out. Measurement tip When using the count down to zero as your setting out method, it is convenient to decrease the number of decimals in the Label 77=dHA. This can be done via menu 13.

Note!  Skip point

ENT

Note - skip point If you during the setting out will have difficulties in being able to set out the point, the program will give you a opportunity to skip it. Just press Reg and the question "Skip Point?" will be displayed. Answer YES to this question and the program will continue with the next setting out point. When you press REG, these are the three values which are stored in the Imem, i.e. deviations from the correct set out point coordinates. Press REG to record deviations or ENT to see coord. of the set out point. In this example we press ENT.

TRK P29 10:18 dN:0.00 dE:0.00 dELE:0.000

ENT

See next page. Note - Rotate the instrument with servo! If you press without measured distance ELE=the height at the theoretical set out point. If you press with measured distance ELE=the height at the measured set out point. If you press longer than 1 sec. with measured distance ELE=the height at the theoretical set out point.

4.3.125

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

Definition of dELE and dHT

How to use Set Out +dELE -dHT Set out point -dELE +dHT

From previous page.

TRK P29 10:18 N:13749.99 E:21447.22 ELE:0.313

These are the actual coordinates of the set out points present position. Press REG to store the deviations seen on the previous page.

REG

TRK

P29 10:18

Sect.=409.990

The program suggests the next section stored in Area file. Key in the section number and centreline offset you want to work with and repeat the above instructions.

4.3.126

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

Radial/Right angle offset method

How to use Set Out

TRK P29 10:18 Radofs:0.00 RT.ofs:0.00 dHT:0.015

When you have a radial and right angle offset of 0.00 the correct lateral set out position has been found, i.e. N&E only!

ENT

TRK P29 10:18 dN:0.00 dE:0.00 dELE:0.000

ENT

When you press REG, these are the three values which are stored in the Imem, i.e. deviations from the correct set out point coordinates. Press REG to record deviations or ENT to see coord. of the set out point. In this example we press ENT.

TRK P29 10:18 N:13749.99 E:21447.22 ELE:0.313

REG

These are the actual coordinates of the set out points present position. Press REG to store the deviations seen on the previous page.

TRK

P29 10:18

Sect.=409.990

The program suggests the next section. Key in the section number and centreline offset you want to work with and repeat the above instructions.

4.3.127

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

How to combine countdown to zero and radial/right angle offset for setting out
In order to benefit most from the inherent intelligence of your Geodimeter, we recommend that you try to combine the two different setting out methods, previously described. Here below is an example of how we combine the countdown to zero method with the radial and right angle offset method.

How to use Set Out

1. If the setting out data for the first section is ok, press YES and the instrument will automatically adopt the TRACKING mode. The display will show the calculated bearing, Hz, and the dHA. 2. Rotate the instrument until the display shows approx. dHA=0.0000. 3. The instrument is now pointing in the direction of the first setting out point. 4. Guide the prism bearer on line with help of the tracklight. 5. As soon as the prism comes within the measurement beam, you will see dHD=remaining distance to your set out point. 6. By pressing ENT at this stage, you are also able to see the radial and right angle offset to the point. When Radofs.= 0.000 and RT.ofs.=0.000, the correct lateral set out position is reached.

4.3.128

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

How to use Set Out

Ref.point

4.3.129

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

Height Setting Out

If cross section data is available for each or some sections, 3 dimensional setting out of cross sections can be executed. The following questions must be answered with YES: 1. It is assumed that elevation exists in your Stn. coordinates. 2. The question height measurement "HT=?" comes up in the program 20 Station Establishment. 3. If YES, "IH=?" (Instrument Height) appears automatically. 4. The question "SH=?" (Signal Height) appears when you enter the setting out part of the program. If you are going to use R.O.E (Remote Object Elevation) we recommend that you key in SH=0. 5. After given section interval and centreline offset the question "SHT" appears. Key in the information given in your cross section. Measurement tip If you would like to set out the height e.g. at +1.0m, add 1.0m to your instrument height and use R.O.E. When dHT=0 you are pointing 1.0m above finished construction level.

How to use Set Out

4.3.130

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 29

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

P29 - 4. Measure STD P0 10:16 HA=392.9095 VA=102.8955

How to use Measure

Choose program 29.

PRG

29

ENT

Roadline 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

4

10:17

Let us select start the measuring. Press 4.

P29 10:17 Job no=_

Key in the number of the Job file in which you want to store the measured point coordinate deviations.

ENT

P29 10:17 1:Xmem off 2:Imem off 3:Serial off

2
ENT

In which memory device to you want to store the Job file. In this case we choose 2. The internal memory and press ENT.

See next page 4.3.131

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

From previous page

PRG 29

P29 10:17 Stn=1_

How to use Measure

ENT

Is "1" your station ? As station establishment was done prior to P29, this station will be proposed now. If no station establishment has been made, P29 will automatically propose establishment when you press ENT.

Sel device10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

2

Choose in what type of device in the roadline data is stored. In this example we have stored the roadline data in Imem.

P29 10:17 Area=

In which area file are the roadline data stored?

ENT

STD P29 10:17 HA:76.5600 VA:86.5555

The instrument is now in theodolite mode. Aim at the first point and press A/M to start measurement.

A/M

STD P29 10:17 HA: 391.2341 HD: 4.641 VD: 0.226

Press the REG key to check the points location according to the roadline.

4.3.132

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 29 - ROADLINE

From previous page

PRG REG 29

How to use Measure

STD Wait

P29 10:17

The program checks if the point lays close to any of the roadline sections. If no section is found INFO 32 will appear. The maximum distance between the point to measure and the nearest roadline section is 1.000m.

STD P29 10:17 Sect.: 804.318 CL.ofs: -16.891 OK ?

YES

The point lays 16.891 meters from roadline section 804.318. If this is ok press YES. If you answer NO the program will check if the point lays close to any other section.

STD

P29 10:17

Pcode=HOUSE

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the measured point. If you leave the line blank no Pcode will be stored and the question will not appear for the next point.

ENT

STD P29 10:17 HA: 39.897 VA: 120.899

The program is now in theodolite mode. If you want to exit the program to program 0 press the program key and then 0.

PRG

4.3.133

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Program 39 - RoadLine 3D
In general Store Horizontal alignment (Roadline) Vertical alignment (Height profile) Cross section (Road profile) Camber (Super elevation) Layer Length Check Setout Measure Slope staking Reference point Registered data 4.3.135 4.3.136 4.3.138 4.3.144 4.3.151 4.3.164 4.3.169 4.3.174 4.3.180 4.3.182 4.3.164 4.3.200 4.3.206 4.3.227

4.3.134

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

In general
PRG

With program 39, RoadLine 3D, you can measure and setout roadlines in three dimensions. The program contains routines for storing, checking, setting 39 out, measuring, slope staking and reference point. Two diffeIn general rent methods can be used while setting out, 1 conventional radial setting out and 2 orthogonal or rectangular setting out.

Structure
1. Store This function is divided in 5 subsections: 1.1 Roadline- to store the horizontal spread of the roadline. 1.2 Vertical alignment - to store the vertical spread of the roadline. 1.3 Cross sections definition - to store the different cross sections for the roadline. 1.4 Cross section - to describe how the different cross sections changes along the road. 1.5 Camber (Super elevation) - to define how much the road slopes. 1.6 Layer - to store road layer data. 1.7 Length - to store length table data (for Swedish railways). 2. Check For mathematical check that the data in the areafiles is correct. 3. Set Out For setting out points along or parallel to the centre of the road. 4. Measure For measuring in existing elements and objects that may lie along the roadline. 5. Slope staking Function to find out where the ground level intersects with the finished road and to set out embankment sides. 6. Reference point Function to set out a point on an optional distance from e.g. a road edge or for measuring in a point and get data for a ref. pnt. It is also possible to define a boning (guide stake) height.
4.3.135

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG Store

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

With this function you store all roadline data, i.e. section interval, centre line offset, section, start- and endpoints of every element and the type of element. 39 In order to survey or set out a road in P39 at all, a description Store of the plane, i.e. the horizontal curve, is required. In order to make a complete description of the vertical spread, a height curve, two cross sections (left and right road halves) and two descriptions of the road camber (super elevation) are required. All these tables are described using a number of elements, where the position of these elements is determined by the section (station), one section value that denotes where the element begins and another that denotes where it ends. The section describes ones whereabouts on the road. The section always describes ones whereabouts on the road in the horizontal plane, even for the vertical descriptions. The elements in the various descriptions are not coupled together and will be dealt with separately in the calculations.
39 PRG

All roadline data will be stored in separate areafiles sorted after type of data according to the following:

Extension nn nn#1 nn#2 nn#3 nn#4 nn#5 nn#6 nn#7 nn#8

Description Section interval and layer Horizontal alignment (roadline) Vertical alignment (height profile) Cross sections definition (road profile) Cross sections for right road half Cross sections for left road half Camber* information for right road half Camber* information for left road half Length table, for defining kilometre sections that aren't a kilometre (mainly for use on Swedish railways)

*Camber = Super elevation

4.3.136

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

Requirements To work with Program 39 the areafile nn#1 must be stored. If you wish to include heights relative to the centre of the road, the areafile nn#2 must be stored. If you have defined a cross section and wish to refer the heights to this, the areafiles nn#3, nn#4 and nn#5 must also be stored. If you wish to use the camber (super elevation) function, also the area files nn#6 and nn#7 must be stored. If you want to use Length tables (mainly for Swedish railways) the area file nn#8 must be stored. If you wish to use the layer function, the areafile nn must be stored. It is not necessary to define a point code in all files, but it is of great help.

Store

4.3.137

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Horizontal alignment

In order to work with P39 at all, you must have keyed in data for the horizontal alignment of the roadline. 39 This will be stored as section (station), the starting point General - coordinates for the element and possibly a radius or a paraHorizontal alignment meter for an arc and clothoid. When you store clothoids (spirals) you can choose between keying in A-parameter or to key in radius and length. The roadline must begin and end with a straight element. The elements on the opposite of a clothoid (spiral) must denote the radius in the conjunction. If this is infinite, the element should be a straight line, otherwise an arc.

S7 S6 S5 S1 S2 S3 S4 Ref. Pnt Stn. Pnt

S8

S9

The following apply to the figure above: S1: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate S2: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, Radius S3: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, A-parameter S4: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, Radius S5: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate S6: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, Radius S7: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, A-parameter S8: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, Radius S9: X-coordinate, Y-coordinate

4.3.138

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

The following data is required to describe the different types of elements for the horizontal alignment of the roadline:

General Horizontal alignment

Typ Straight

Label 80 37 38 80 37 38 64 80 37 38 81

Description Section (Station) X-coordinate Y-coordinate Section (Station) X-coordinate Y-coordinate Radius, Left=-, Right=+ Section (Station) X-coordinate Y-coordinate A-parameter*

Arc

Clothoid (Spiral)

* You can choose between keying in the A-parameter or radius and length.

Example of an areafile with a horizontal alignment:

80=0.000 37=37305.028 38=73505.770 80=68.480 37=37350.638 38=73556.850 64=750.000 80=919.863 37=37480.143 38=74352.784 64=3200.000 80=1803.633 37=37023.901 38=75106.401 80=1803.634 37=37023.900 38=75106.400 4.3.139

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Store horizontal alignment

PRG PRG 39 ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT.

Store horizontal alignment

Roadl.3D 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

1

10:17

Select 1 Store.

Store P39 10:17 1 Roadline 2 Vertical alig. 3 Cross sect.def 1

Since its the horizontal alignment you will store, Select 1 Roadline.

Sel.dev. 1 Xmem 2 Imem

10:17

Select in which memory unit you wish to store the horizontal alignment. In this case we choose 2 Imem.

2 Key in the name of the Areafile in which you wish to store the roadline and press ENT. The areafile will automatically get the extension, #1.

P39 10:17 Area=

ENT

See next page 4.3.140

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Store horizontal alignment Note. A-param

Clothoid 10:17 1 A-param 2 Radius/Length

1

Here you can choose how the clothoid (spiral) will be described, stored and calculated; either with an A-parameter or with radius and length. In this case we choose 1 Aparam.

P39 10:17 Sect.=_

Key in the first section (station) number for the roadline and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Sect.=XXX.XXX N=

ENT

Key in the Northing value of the chosen and press ENT.

P39 10:17 Sect.=XXX.XXX E=

ENT

Key in the Easting value of the chosen and press ENT.

See next page 4.3.141

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Store horizontal alignment

P39 10:17 Sect.=XXX.XXX Straight?

ENT

Select type of roadline element by pressing NO until the correct element type is displayed. In this example we choose Straight and press ENT.

P39 10:17 Sect.=

Key in the next section (station) point and repeat the above instructions.

ENT

P39 10:17 Sect.= Roadline end?

ENT

When you are selecting the last roadline element, select Roadline end. This means that the last element will be stored as a straight line.

4.3.142

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

Vertical alignment

If you have chosen to include heights in the calculations for the roadline, there must be a description of the vertical 39 alignment. General - The height for the roadline gives a description of the middle Vertical alignment line in the vertical plane. A height profile is described by defining height elements with consecutive section values. The end section (station) of an element is identical to the start section (station) of the next element. The elements can be of the type straight, arc or parabola. To define a straight element only the height and the section (station) at the start- and end points is required. A circular or a parabel element also require a start slope. This means that you need to enter a start slope if the previous element type is not a straight line. If a start direction is stated, this should be used. If the coefficient for a parabola is entered as zero, the coefficient will be calculated by the program when it is to be used. This requires that a slope exists both before and after this parabolic element.

S2, H2, R S1, H1 H3-H4

S3, H3

S6, H6, C S4, H4, R S5, H5

S7, H7

S8, H8

S4-S3

The following apply to the figure above: S=Section (Station) H=Height R=Radius of circle arc C=Coefficient for a parabola, in the form Y=C*X2.
4.3.143

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

The following data is required to describe the different element types for the vertical alignment:

General Vertical alignment

Type Straight

Label 80 39 80 39 44* 64 80 39 44* 84 80 39

Description Section (Station) ELE, Height Section (Station) ELE, Height Start slope, Up=+, Down=Radius, Up=+, Down=Section (Station) ELE, Height Start slope, Up=+, Down=Coefficient Section (Station) ELE, Height

Arc

Parabola

End

* Not mandatory if the previous element type is a straight line.

Example on a areafile with a height profile:

80=60 39=16.004 80=80 39=15.657 80=450.568 39=11.581 64=8000 80=746.568 39=13.801 80=1233.983 39=26.474 64=-16000 . . 4.3.144

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

Store vertical alignment

PRG PRG 39 ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT.

Store vertical alignment

Roadl. 3D 10:17 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

1

Select 1 Store.

Store

P39 10:17
Since it is the vertical alignment you will store, select 2 Vertical alig.

1 Roadline 2 Vertical alig. 3 Cross sect.def 2

P39 10:17 Area=

Key in the name of the areafile in which you wish to store the vertical alignment and press ENT. The area file will automatically get the extension, #2.

ENT

Sel. dev. 10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

Select in which memory unit you wish to store the vertical alignment. In this case we choose, 2 Imem.

See next page 4.3.145

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Store vertical alignment Note Straight

Store 10:17 1 Straight 2 Arc 3 Parabola

1

Select element type, 1 Straight, 2 Arc, 3 Parabola or 4 Roadline end. In this case we choose 1 Straight.

P39 10:17 Sect.=_

Key in the first section (station) number for the roadline and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Sect.=XXX.XXX ELE=

Key in the height value for the chosen section (station) and press ENT.

ENT

Note Arc

Store P39 10:17 1 Straight 2 Arc 3 Parabola

2

Select type of element, 1 Straight, 2 Arc, 3 Parabola or 4 Roadline end. In this case we choose 2 Arc.

See next page 4.3.146

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Store vertical alignment

P39 10:17 Sect.=

Key in the second section (station) number for the roadline and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Sect.=XXX.XXX ELE=

ENT

Key in height value for the chosen section (station) and press ENT.

Note Radius: Up=+ Down=-

P39 10:17 Sect.=XXX.XXX ELE= Radius=

ENT

Key in the radius of the arc and press ENT. A radius that turns upwards is keyed in with a positive figure and a radius turning downwards with a negative figure.

P39 10:17 Sect.=XXX.XXX Slope= Radius=

ENT

Key in a start direction for the arc and press ENT. Upwards is entered with at positive figure and downwards with a negative. This display will not be shown if this data is not required, i.e. if the first element is straight.

See next page 4.3.147

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Store vertical alignment

Note Parabola

Store P39 10:17 1 Straight 2 Arc 3 Parabola

3

Select type of element, 1 Straight, 2 Arc, 3 Parabola or 4 Roadline end. In this case we choose 3 Parabola.

Note Coeff.

P39 10:17 1 Radius 2 Coefficient

Select 1 if you wish to key in a radius for the parabola or 2 if you wish to key in a coefficient. In this case we select 2 coefficient.

P39 10:17 Sect.=

Key in the third section number for the roadline and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Sect.=XXX.XXX ELE=

Key in the height value for the chosen section (station) and press ENT.

ENT

See next page 4.3.148

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Store vertical alignment

P39 10:17 Sect.=XXX.XXX Slope=

ENT

Key in a start direction for the parabola and press ENT. Upwards is entered with at positive figure and downwards with a negative. This display will not be shown if this data is not required, i.e. if the previous element is straight.

P39 10:17 Sect.=XXX.XXX Slope= Coeff.=

ENT

Key in coefficient for the parabola and press ENT. If you key in 0.000 the parabola will be calculated by the program provided that the intersection of both lines lies half-way between the two points that are about to be connected.

Note Roadline end

Store P39 10:17 1 Straight 2 Arc 3 Parabola

4

Continue to key in the different elements for the vertical alignment. Select 4 Roadline when you are finished.

P39 10:17 Sect.=

ENT

Key in fourth and last section (station) number for the roadline and press ENT. Key in the end section (station) or leave the line blank if you already have defined the end of the height curve. In this case we leave it blank.

4.3.149

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Cross section
The cross section is divided in 3 different areafiles; #3, which contains all cross section definitions which will be used along the road, #4 which describes how the right half of the road changes along the road and #5 which describes the same thing for the left half of the road. Cross section definitions (road profiles) The cross section is defined by a number of breakpoints as Horizontal and Vertical offsets (difference in height from the Centre line) and possibly a radius. If a point has a radius and there is another point further on, these two points are joined together with an arc irrespective of the direction of the tangent. The tangent direction for the radius in the starting point is defined by the direction for the previous line. If no start direction exists, the arc will get the start direction 0, i.e. horizontal direction. A radius turning upwards shall be given a positive sign and a radius turning downwards a negative sign.
L4, H
slope. 1 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1, H1 H3

General Cross section

Centre line L0, H0

4, R
H4

slope. 4

An example of the road profile is shown in the figure above: L=Distance from the centre line H=Height difference from the Centre line R=Radius of circle arc
4.3.150

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

The number of break points that can be used to describe the cross section is limited to 12 per road half. If the first Centre line offset is not equal to zero, it is assumed that the first point lies at a height of zero on the centre line. It is not necessary to describe point codes for all points, but the point code is of great help if you wish to search for a specific point by name. Separate tables are used to describe which cross sections are to be used along a certain part of road. These cross section descriptions will only describe one road half only and can then be used to describe both the left and right road halves. The points are described below:

General Cross section

Type Cross section Straight

Label 88 4 83

Description Cross section number Point code Centre line offset. Distance from Centre line to the point at which the slope or bend shall be defined. Elevation. Difference in height from the Centre line. Point code Centre line offset. Distance from Centre line to the point at which the slope or bend shall be defined. Elevation. Difference in height from the Centre line. Radius of road profile. Requires a tangent direction at the starting point of the arc if there is no new point to follow. Up=+, Down=-

85

Arc

4 83

85 64

4.3.151

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Example of an areafile with cross sections:

88=1 4=1 83=0 85=0 4=2 83=6 85=-0.2 4=3 83=7 85=-1.0 . .

General Cross section

Cross section definitions for left and right road half (profile curve) Changes in the cross section along the road are stored in two separate area files, one for the right and one for the left side of the road. Reference is made to the predefined profiles in areafile #3. The extension for the right half is #4 and for the left #5.
Sect.=900 Sect.=800 Sect.=80

The program will interpolate a transition if you define where the cross section 1 ends and where the cross section 2 starts.

If you dont define where the cross section 1 ends you will get a steep transition between cross section 1 and 2.

4.3.152

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

General Cross sections

If the beginning or end of the road is undefined, i.e. if the start section (station) for the first cross section is a distance along the roadline or if the end section (station) is defined before the end of the road, the height at the middle of the road will be valid for the whole of the cross section. If there is no cross section defined, the latest profile is valid for the remainder of the road. The cross section definitions are stored as described below:
Type Straight Label 80 88 80 88 . . 80 88 80 80 88 Description Section (Station) Cross section number

Profile transition

Section (Station) Cross section number End of 1:st cross section Start of 2:nd cross section Cross section number

Example of an areafile with cross section definitions:

80=80 88=1 80=800 80=900 88=2 80=1800

4.3.153

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Store cross section data - with length and height difference

3
ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT.

Store cross section data with distance and height

Roadl. 3D 10:17 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

1

Select 1 Store.

Store P39 10:17 1 Roadline 2 Vertical alig. 3 Cross sect.def 3

Since it is a cross section you will store, select 3 Cross sect.def.

P39 10:17 Area=

Key in the name of the areafile in which you wish to store the cross section and press ENT. The areafile will automatically get the extension, #3.

ENT

Sel. dev. 10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

2

Select in which memory unit you wish to store the profile. In this case we select 2 Imem.

See next page 4.3.154

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Store cross section data with distance and height

P39 10:17 Profil=

Key in the number for the profile you wish to define and press ENT.

ENT

Enter P39 10:17 1 HT 2 Slope

1

Select 1 HT, if you wish to enter the profile with distance and difference in height, or 2 Slope, if you wish to enter the profile with a slope and a distance. In this case we select 1 HT. Note ! If you choose alt. 2 you can not enter the radius but you store data as a slope and the program will calculate this into a height. Select type of element, 1 Straight or 2 Arc. 3 Ready you choose if you are ready with storing cross sections. In this case we select 1 Straight.

Note Straight

P39 10:17 1 Straight 2 Arc 3 Ready

1

P39 10:17 Pcode=_

Here you can key in a code for the point. This can then be useful if you wish to search for the point by its code.

ENT

See next page 4.3.155

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Store cross section data with distance and height

P39 10:17 Cl.ofs=

Key in the the Centre line offset and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Cl.ofs= Pht=

Key in the difference in height between the middle of the road and the chosen profile and press ENT.

ENT

Note Arc

Store P39 10:17 1 Straight 2 Arc 3 Ready

2

Select type of element, 1 Straight or 2 Arc. 3 Ready you choose if you are ready with storing cross sections. In this case we select 2 Arc.

P39 10:17 Pcode=_

ENT

Here you can key in a code for the point. This can then be useful if you wish to search for the point by its code.

See next page 4.3.156

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Store cross section data with distance and height

P39 10:17 Cl.ofs=

Key in the the Centre line offset and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Cl.ofs Pht=

ENT

Key in the difference in height between the middle of the road and the chosen profile and press ENT.

Note Radius: Up=+ Down=-

P39 10:17 Cl.ofs= Pht= Radius=

ENT

Key in the radius of the arc and press ENT. A radius that turns upwards is keyed in with a positive figure and a radius turning downwards with a negative figure. When you have keyed in all parts of the road profile you select 3 Ready.

4.3.157

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Store cross section definitions - with slope

3
ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT.

Store cross section definitions with slope

Roadl. 3D 10:17 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

1

Select 1 Store.

Store P39 10:17 1 Roadline 2 Vertical alig. 3 Cross sect.def 3

Since it is a road profile you will store, select 3 Road profile.

P39 10:17 Area=

Key in the name of the areafile in which you wish to store the profile and press ENT. The areafile will automatically get the extension, #3.

ENT

Sel. dev. 10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

2

Select in which memory unit you wish to store the profile. In this case we select 2 Imem.

See next page 4.3.158

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Store cross section definitions with slope

P39 10:17 Profil=

Key in the number for the profile you wish to define and press ENT.

ENT

Enter P39 10:17 1 HT 2 Slope

2

Select 1 HT, if you wish to enter the profile with distance and difference in height, or 2 Slope, if you wish to enter the profile with a slope. In this case we select 2 Slope. Note ! If you choose alt. 2 you can not enter the radius but you store data as difference in height and the program will calculate this into a slope. Proceed with 1 Straight or quit storing road profiles with 2 Ready. In this case we select 1 Straight.

Note Straight

P39 10:17 1 Straight 2 Ready

1

P39 10:17 Pcode=

Here you can key in a code for the point. This can then be useful if you wish to search for the point by its code.

ENT

4.3.159

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Store cross section definitions with slope Note Slope: Up=+ Down=-

P39 10:17 Slope=_

Key in the slope from the middle of the road in percent and press ENT. In this case we key in 0.02 which is the same as a slope of 2%.

ENT

P39 10:17 Slope= Cl.Ofs=_

Key in the Centre line offset and press ENT.

ENT

When you have keyed in all parts of the profile, select 2 Ready.

4.3.160

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

Store cross section

PRG PRG 39

3
ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT.

Store cross section

Roadl. 3D 10:17 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

1

Select 1 Store and press ENT.

Store P39 10:17 4 Cross section 5 Camber 6 Layer

4

Since it is a cross section you are about to store, select 4 Cross section.

P39 10:17 Area=

Key in the name of the areafile in which you wish to store the cross section and press ENT.

ENT

Sel. dev. 10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

2

Select in which memory device you wish to store the cross section. In this case we select 2 Imem.

See next page 4.3.161

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Store cross section

P39 10:17 Right ?

ENT

Here you can select which road half you shall define, right or left. Press ENT to accept or NO to select left. Note -Pressing NO when the left alternative displayed means that the program jumps to the previous menu.) The areafile will automatically get the extension, #4 if you select right or #5 if you select left.

P39 10:17 Sect.=_

Key in the section (station) number for the first cross section and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Sect.= Profil=

ENT

Key in the profile that should be valid for the chosen section and press ENT.

P39 10:17 1 more 2 Ready

2

Press 1 more if you wish to continue defining more profiles for the right road half or 2 Ready if you are finished with this half of the road.

4.3.162

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Store cross section

P39 10:17 Sect.=

Key in an end section (station) for the right half of the road. This can however be blank; that means that the latest profile is valid for the remainder of the road.

ENT

P39 10:17 Left ?

Press ENT to define the left road half or NO to exit.

YES

Continue describing the cross sections for the left half of the road in the same way as for the right road half.

4.3.163

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Camber (Super elevation)

The camber (super elevation) defines the slope of the road. The left and right halves of the road are defined separately. 39 When describing how one half of the road changes along the General - road, a section (station) and the slope in that section are Camber defined. If the slope between two sections (stations) is changing, the slope will gradually change and the correct slope will be obtained in the next section (station). The slope is stated as a decimal (tangent of the slope angle) and is positive upwards and negative downwards based on the Centre line.

Centre line V V=camber angle

Alternatively, an offset from the Centre line can be entered and the camber (super elevation) defined from this point (see fig. below).
Centre line V L0 V=camber angle

4.3.164

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

General Camber

The start section (station) of the next element is the end section (station) of the previous element. The change of the slope within the element will be linear so that it corresponds to the slope of the next element at its start point. If there is no new element, the slope of the last element will be applicable for the remainder of the roadline. Data for the camber (super elevation) of the road are stored as follows:

Type Camber about Centre line

Label 80 44

Description Section (Station) Slope, Up=+, Down=-

Camber with an offset

80 83

44

Section (Station) Centre line offset. Distance from the Centre line to where the road profile should slope. Slope, Up=+, Down=-

Example of an areafile with camber (super elevation) data:

80=80.000 44=0.01 80=180 83=1.5 44=0.03 80=1250 44=0.01 80=1800 . .

4.3.165

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Store Camber (Super elevation) data

PRG PRG 39

3
ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT.

Store camber data

Roadl. 3D 10:17 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

1
ENT

Select 1 Store and press ENT.

Store P39 10:17 4 Cross section 5 Camber 6 Layer

5

Since it is camber data you will store, select 5 Camber (Super elevation).

P39 10:17 Area=

Key in the name of the areafil in which you wish to store camber (super elevation) data and press ENT.

ENT

Sel. dev. 10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

2

Select in which memory unit you wish to store camber (super elevation) data. In this case we select 2 Imem.

See next page 4.3.166

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Store camber data

P39 10:17 Right ?

ENT

Here you can select which road half you shall define, right or left. Press ENT to accept or NO to select left. Note -Pressing NO when the left alternative displayed means that the program jumps to the previous menu.) The areafile will automatically get the extension, #6 if you select right or #7 if you select left.

P39 10:17 Sect.=_

Key in the first section (station) number for the camber (super elevation) and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Sect.= Cl.Ofs=

ENT

Key in a Centre line offset around which the road half should slope and press ENT. Key in zero if the slope should be around the Centre line.

Note Slope: Up=+ Down=-

P39 10:17 Sect.= Cl.Ofs= Slope=

ENT

Key in the slope from the start section (station) in percent and press ENT. E.g. 2% should be key in as 0.02.

4.3.167

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Store camber data

P39 10:17 1 more 2 Ready

Press 1 more if you wish to continue storing camber (super elevation) data for the right road half or 2 Ready if you are finished with this road half.

P39 10:17 Sect.=

Key in a end section (station) for the right half of the road. This can however be blank; that means that the latest profile is valid for the remainder of the road.

ENT

P39 10:17 Left ?

YES

Press ENT to define the left road half or NO to exit.

Continue storing the camber data for the left half of the road in the same way as for the right road half.

4.3.168

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

Layers
The road consists of different layers. At startup you can key in the layer you wish to work with and what point code the road embankment should have (this to identify the roadway). These layers must be prestored in an areafile. This areafile also contains the layer height. New cross sections will then be calculated continuously. The changes lies in where the roadway intersects with the road embankment. If the roadway has a slope, the height difference from the original cross section will be larger than the layer heights, since the layer runs with the slope of the roadway. If no layers are defined, the unmodified cross section will be used. A single roadway gives only one point of intersection. The roadway in this example has a slope of the angle v.

General layers

Centre line Pcode describes where the road embankment is

New calculated intersection point, CL.ofs

Layer height

Different layers

If the cross section have two embankments, two points of intersection will be calculated.

4.3.169

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

The point code denotes where the road embankment is, i.e. which element that is the road embankment. The program 39 will search after a point with a given point code and will then lower the element that ends with the road embankment code. General If there are more points with the exact code the last point will layers be used (highways can have two road embankments). The program will then calculate new cross section points for the road embankments. If there are no point code entered or if the entered point code does not exist, it is assumed that the roadway begins at the middle of the road. The different layers for the road are described as follows:
Type First layer Label 80 4 86 0 87 Description Start section (station) Point code for road embankment Layer ident., name or no. Layer description, e.g. type of material Difference in height from the road profile Layer ident., name or no. Layer description, e.g. type of material Difference in height from the road profile

Next layer

86 0 87

Example of an areafile with layer data:

4=2 86=1 0=LAYER1 87=0.2 86=2 0=LAYER2 87=0.5 86=3 0=LAYER3 87=0.8 4.3.170

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

Store Layer data

PRG PRG 39

3
ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT.

Store layer data

Roadl. 3D 10:17 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

1
ENT

Select 1 Store and press ENT.

Store P39 10:17 4 Cross section 5 Camber 6 Layer

6

Since it is layer data you are about to store, select 6 Layer.

P39 10:17 Area=

Key in the name of the area file in which you wish to store layer data and press ENT.

ENT

Sel. dev. 10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

2

Select in which memory unit you wish to store layer data. In this case we select 2 Imem.

See next page 4.3.171

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Store layer data

P39 10:17 Sect.=

Key in the first section number and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Sect.= Pcode=_

ENT

Key in a point code for the road embankment and press ENT.

P39 10:17 Layer=

Key in a identification for the chosen layer, brief name or number and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Layer= Info=

Key in a description of the layer and press ENT.

ENT

See next page 4.3.172

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Store layer data

P39 10:17 Layer= Info= LayerH=

ENT

Key in the difference in height to the cross section and press ENT.

P39 10:17 more ?

NO

Do you wish to continue defining more layers for the current section you press ENT, otherwise press NO. In this case we press NO.

P39 10:17 1 more 2 Ready

2

Press 1 more if you wish to continue defining layers for other sections or 2 Ready if you are finished.

P39 10:17 Sect.=

Key in a end section (station) for the keyed in layer data and press ENT. This can however be blank; that means that the latest layer definition is valid for the remainder of the road.

ENT

4.3.173

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Length table - in general

Swedish railways use a special section definition. Each section is described as an even kilometre figure. If a railway track is modified, e.g shortened, the kilometre figures does no longer correspond with the actual track length. This is where the length table comes in use. Here label 80, which in all other RoadLine applications stores section (Sect.) data, is now used for storing the kilometre figure of the length table. RoadLine section is now stored in label 35 instead. The length table must always be stored with the file extention #8.are. This will be done automatically when keying in length data from a Geodimeter control unit. All kilometre data about the length table is stored in label 80. All other Roadline section data (S) now uses label 35 if Length table is used. When storing a Lenght table from the Geodimeter control unit you choose alternative 7 Lenghts from the Store menu. The keying in of length data can be done in two different ways: 35=3+955.364 or 35=3 955.364

General Length table

meaning kilometre no. 3 has a length of 955.364 metres. The difference between the two examples is that you can use either a + sign or a space between the kilometre number and the length. If you are loading the length table data from a computer it is best to use the + sign. Note!  Note! If you are going to key in a length table from a Geodimeter control unit it is important that you key in this table (#8.are -file) before any other Roadline data. Otherwise wrong labels will be used for the rest of the Roadline calculations. If you transfer length table data from a computer it doesn't matter when you do this the right labels are used automatically.
4.3.174

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

Example of an areafile with length table data:

80=1 89=1002.892 80=2 89=976.475 80=3 89=955.364 . . for kilomtre no. 1 length of kilometre no. 1 for kilometre no. 2 length of kilometre no. 2 for kilometre no. 3 length of kilomtre no. 3

General Length table

4.3.175

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Store Length data (mainly used for Swedish railways)

3
ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT.

Store Length data

Roadl. 3D 10:17 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

1
ENT ENT

Select 1 Store and press ENT twice.

Store P39 10:17 7 Length 8 Exit

Since it is length data you are about to store, select 7 Length.

P39 10:17 Area=

Key in the name of the area file in which you wish to store length data and press ENT.

ENT

Sel. dev. 10:17 1 Imem 2 Xmem

1

Select in which memory unit you wish to store layer data. In this case we select 1 Imem.

See next page 4.3.176

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Store Length data

P39 10:17 Sect.=

Key in the first section number and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Sect.=1 Length=_

ENT

Key in actual length for the first kilometre and press ENT.

P39 10:17 more?

Do you want to enter more lengths? Press ENT to add more lengths or NO to exit Length. In this example we will enter one more length.

ENT

P39 10:17 Sect.=

Key in the second section number and press ENT.

ENT

See next page 4.3.177

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Store Length data

P39 10:17 Sect.=2 Length=_

Key in actual length for the second kilometre and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 more?

Do you want to enter more lengths? Press ENT to add more lengths or NO to exit Length. In this example we are satisfied with 2 lengths and answer NO.

NO

Store P39 10:17 1 Roadline 2 Vertical alig. 3 Cross sect.def

You are taken back to the Store menu and can now continue with Program 39.

4.3.178

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

Store Length data

The length table must always be stored with the file extention #8.are. This will be done automatically when keying in length data from a Geodimeter Control Unit. All kilometre data about length tables is stored in label 80. All other Roadline section data (S) now uses label 35 if Length table is used. Example of an areafile with length table data:
80=1 89=1002.892 80=2 89=976.475 80=3 89=955.364 . . for kilomtre no. 1 length of kilometre no. 1 for kilometre no. 2 length of kilometre no. 2 for kilometre no. 3 length of kilomtre no. 3

4.3.179

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Check
This function mathematically checks that the data in the areafiles is correct. All errors in excess of 20mm horizontally and 10mm vertically will be displayed and the element in which they occur. The control function will also notify slope deviations larger than 0.01, i.e. 1%. Errors which occur due to wrongly keyed in data can be easily rectified with the help of Edit. Note - Error A detected error can depend on either keyed in errors or incorrect design of the roadline.

39 PRG 39

Check

PRG

3
ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT.

Roadl. 3D 10:17 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

2

Select 2 Check and press ENT.

Check P39 10:17 1 Roadline 2 Vertical alig. 3 Cross section 1

See next page

Select which type of object you wish to check. In this case we select 1 Roadline. The other options are: 2 Vertical alig. 3 Cross sect. def. 4 Camber (Super elevation) 5 Layer 6 Length 7 All files 8 Exit 4.3.180

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Check

Sel. dev. 1 Xmem 2 Imem

2

10:17

Select in which device roadline data is stored. In this case we select 2 Imem.

P39 10:17 Area=

Key in the name of the area file you wish to check and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Elem:1 Diff:

ENT

The program check each element stored. Note ! A comparison with the total longitudinal centre line measurement of each individual section (station) is carried out. If the final result gives an error message, one or more elements contain errors in which curve length errors are 20mm. Recheck the roadline and define the element with an error. The element can be changed with Edit.

4.3.181

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Setout
Before any setting out task can be commenced you will have to do a free or known station establishment. This is done with Program 20, Stn Est. After having stored the roadline and thereafter checked that it is OK you can start with setting out. After keying in section (station) and Centre line offset values the program will calculate bearing and distance to these roadline points. Three-dimensional setting out of cross sections can be performed if heights have been included in the station establishment. Storage of control data The coordinate deviations will represent the differences between the stored set out point coordinates and the actual set out point coordinates. This is the basis of the printed out data sheet which will act as proof of having carried out your setting out task to within the contract specified accuracy. These deviations (dN, dE, dELE) are much easier to use than comparing coordinates. If you dont want to store any control data, clear the suggested Job file, and press ENT. Control data that will be stored are:
Label 80 (or 35) 83 39 86 87 36 40 41 42 Description Section (Station) Centre line offset ELE Layer Layer height Ht.Ofs dN dE dELE

39 PRG 39

Setout

If height measurement is carried out elevations are also stored (staked elevation). If you wish to store other control data you can configurate the user defined output table (see page 4.3).
4.3.182

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

How to combine countdown to zero and radial/right angle offset for setting out
In order to benefit most from the inherent intelligence of your instrument, we recommend that you try to combine the above mentioned setting out methods. Here below is an example: 1. If the setting out data for the first section (station) is OK, press ENT and the instrument will automatically adopt TRK mode. The display will show the calculated bearing and the dHA. 2. Rotate the instrument until the display shows 0.0000 opposite dHA. With a servo instrument, press . 3. The instrument is now pointing in the direction of the point. 4. Guide the prism bearer on line with help of the Tracklight. 5. As soon as the prism comes within the measurement beam, you will see dHD=remaining distance to your set out point. 6. If you are in robotic mode, you can easily translate the dHA and dHD values into Radofs. and RT.ofs to the point. When both these values are 0, the correct lateral set out position is reached.
Referenceobject Measured point dHD Radofs

Setout

dHA Instrument point

RT.ofs Set out point

4.3.183

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Setout
PRG PRG 39

3
ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT.

Setout

Roadl. 3D 10:17 1 Store 2 Check 3 Setout

3

Select 3 Setout and press ENT.

P39 10:17 Job no=_

Key in the job file in which you wish to store the set out point coordinate deviations.

ENT

P39 10:17 1 Xmem OFF 2 Imem OFF 3 Serial OFF

2
ENT

Select in which memory unit you wish to store the data and press ENT. In this case we select 2 Imem.

STD Stn=1

P39 10:17

ENT

Is this the station you chose when you ran program 20, prior to P39? If no station establishment has been made, P39 will automatically start P20. It is impossible to start with setting out before you have established your instrument. In this example we accept the station and press ENT.

See next page 4.3.184

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Setout

P39 10:17 Area=_

Key in the name of the area file in which the roadline data is stored and press ENT.

ENT

Sel. dev. 1 Xmem 2 Imem

10:17

Select in what type of device in which the roadline data is stored. In this case we choose 2 Imem.

P39 10:17 HT Measure?

ENT

Do you wish to set out heights? Press ENT to accept. If you select not to set out heights the answer will be NO which means that the instrument height and the signal height will not be prompted. In this case we choose to accept with ENT.

P39 10:17 SH=

Enter the signal height and press ENT. This question only appears if you have chosen to include heights in the previous display.

ENT

See next page 4.3.185

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Setout

P39 10:17 Ht.Ofs=_

Key in a boning (guide stake) height if you wish to move up the set out point on the rod and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Roadline check Wait !

The program checks the element combinations. Wait !

P39 10:17 Pcode=

If you have chosen to include point codes you can key in a code here. The program will choose points with this code. If you have chosen not to include point codes, leave this line blank and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Layer=

Key in the layer on which you wish to set out the point and press ENT or leave the line blank if you dont want to work with layers.

ENT

See next page 4.3.186

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Setout

P39 10:17 Layer:1 Descr:LAYER1 OK?

ENT

Is this the correct layer? If not press NO. In this case we accept with ENT.

P39 10:17 New Cl.ofs ?

ENT

Do you want the program to calculate a new centre line offset, see fig. on page 169, for the road embankment press ENT, otherwise press NO and you will work at the same centre line offset. This display will not be shown if you have not defined a layer. Select which section interval you shall have in this roadline and press ENT. If you choose this interval when you stored the roadline, the program selects that value.

P39 10:17 SecInc=

ENT

P39 10:17 Sect.=

The program suggests the last used section (station) in the area file, but this can easily be changed into any value. In this case we accept the section (station) with ENT.

ENT

See next page 4.3.187

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Setout with countdown to zero

Setoutwith countdown to zero

Layerinfo 10:17 Layer:1 Descr:LAYER1 LayerH:0.200

ENT

Here the layer information is displayed for the chosen section. Press ENT to proceed.

P39 10:17 Cl.ofs=

Now you can select the offset value you wish to set out. In this case we select 0 and press ENT. Is there a cross section stored will the offset values be taken from this, or by the point code.

ENT

Ok? P39 10:17 Sect.:400.000 Cl.ofs:0.00 Pcode:

ENT

Is the setting out data OK? If so, press ENT. The instrument automatically adopts the TRK-mode.

TRK HA: dHA:

P39 10:17 129.8210 170.3595

The instrument should be rotated to the right 170.3595 degrees. -=Left +=Right This method is called the count down to zero angle method. See page 4.3.192 for the radial/right angle method.

See next page 4.3.188

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page When the instrument displays 0.0000 opposite dHA it is pointing in the direction of the point. HA is the calculated bearing to the point. Measurement tip - for mechanical When using the count down to zero as your setting out method, it is convenient to decrease the number of decimals in the Label 77=dHA. This can be done via menu 13. As soon as the prism comes within the measurement beam you will see dHD,i.e. how much you must change the horizontal distance from the instrument. +=increase -=decrease In this case the prism is on line but the distance has to be increased by 2.75m. When you are finished, i.e. dHD=0.000 you can press REG for the next point or ENT to see Radofs and RT.ofs. In this case we press ENT.

Setoutwith countdown to zero

TRK HA: dHA:

P39 10:17 300.1805 0.0000

TRK dHA: dHD: dHT:

P39 10:17 0.0000 2.75 -0.155

ENT

TRK P39 10:17 Radofs: 0.00 RT.ofs: 0.00 dHT: 0.000

ENT

When the Radofs and RT.ofs are 0.000 you have found the correct lateral set out position.

See next page

4.3.189

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Referenceobject

Measured point dHD Radofs

Setoutwith countdown to zero dHA Instrument point

RT.ofs Set out point

From previous page

Note - Skip point If during the setting out you have difficulties in being able to set out the point, you have a opportunity to skip it. Just turn the instrument until HD disappears (30cm) and press REG and the question "Skip Point?" will be displayed. Answer ENT to this question and the program will continue with the next setting out point.

TRK P39 10:17 dN: 0.00 dE: 0.00 dELE: 0.000

ENT

When you press REG, these are the values which are stored in the Job file, i.e. deviations from the correct set out point coordinates. Press ENT to see the coordinates for the point.

See next page Rotate the instrument with servo If you press this key without measured distance ELE=the height at the theoretical set out point. If you press this key with measured distance ELE=the height at the measured set out point. If you press this key longer than 1 sec. with measured distance ELE=the height at the theoretical set out point. 4.3.190

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

Setoutwith countdown to zero

+dELE

-dHT Set out point

-dELE From previous page

+dHT

TRK P39 10:17 X: 13479.99 Y: 21447.22 Z: 0.313

REG

These are the actual coordinates of the set out points present position. Press REG to store the deviations seen on the previous page.

P39 10:17 more ?

Do you wish to continue setting out more points, press ENT. Otherwise press NO and you will return to the main menu. In this case we continue with ENT.

ENT

See next page 4.3.191

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Setout with radial/right angle offset

Setoutwith radial/ right angle offset

P39 10:17 Sect.=420.000

The program suggests the next section (station). Key in the section (station) and the Centre line offset you wish to set out

ENT

Ok? P39 10:17 Sect.: 420.000 Cl.ofs:0.00 Pcode:

ENT

Is the setting out data OK? If so, press ENT. The instrument automatically adopts the TRK-mode. When the prism is found, press ENT to see Radofs and RT.ofs.

TRK P39 10:17 Radofs: 0.00 RT.ofs: 0.00 dHT: 0.000

ENT

When Radofs and RT.ofs are 0.00 the correct lateral set out position has been found. Press REG directly if you do not wish to see the other display pages. In this case we press ENT to see the coordinates and deviations.

TRK P39 10:17 dN: 0.00 dE: 0.00 dELE: 0.000

ENT

When you press REG, these are the values which are stored in the Job file, i.e. deviations from the correct set out point coordinates. Press ENT to see the coordinates for the point.

See next page 4.3.192

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Setoutwith radial/ right angle offset

TRK P39 10:17 N: 13479.99 E: 21447.22 ELE: 0.313

REG

These are the actual coordinates of the set out points present position. Press REG to store the deviations seen on the previous page.

TRK

P39 10:17

Sect.=440.000

The program suggests the next section (station). Key in the section (station) and the Centre line offset you wish to set out

ENT

4.3.193

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Measure
This option enables the operator to localize the section (station), Centre line and the difference in height relative to a stored roadline. You simply measure an arbitrary point and the program calculates the section (station)/Centre line offset and coordinates of the point. This part of the program is especially suitable for cross sectioning or localizing an obstacle when checking a planned section of road.

39 PRG 39

Measure

4.3.194

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

Measure
PRG PRG 39

3
ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT until this display appears.

Measure

Roadl. 3D 10:17 4 Measure 5 Slopestake 6 Ref.Point

4
ENT

Select 4 Measure and press ENT.

P39 10:17 Job no=_

Key in the Job file in which you wish to store the measured point coordinate deviations.

ENT

P39 10:17 1 Xmem OFF 2 Imem OFF 3 Serial OFF

2
ENT

Select in which memory unit you wish to store the Job file and press ENT. In this case we select 2 Imem.

P39 10:17 Stn=1

ENT

Is this the station you chose when you ran program 20, prior to P39? If no station establishment has been made, P39 will automatically start P20. It is impossible to start with setting out before you have established your instrument. In this example we accept the station and press ENT.

See next page 4.3.195

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Measure

P39 10:17 Area=_

Key in the name of the area file in which the roadline data is stored and press ENT.

ENT

Sel. dev. 10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

2

Select in what type of device in which the roadline data is stored. In this case we choose 2 Imem.

P39 10:17 HT measure ?

ENT

Do you wish to set out heights? Press ENT to accept. If you select not to set out heights the answer will be NO which means that the instrument height and the signal height will not be prompted. In this case we choose to accept with ENT.

P39 10:17 SH=

Enter the signal height and press ENT. This question only appears if you have chosen to include heights in the previous display.

ENT

See next page 4.3.196

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Measure

P39 10:17 Roadline check Wait !

The program checks the stored data. Wait !

P39 10:17 Layer=

ENT

Key in the layer on which you wish to measure the point and press ENT or leave the line blank if you dont want to work with layers.

P39 10:17 Layer:1 Descr:LAYER1 OK?

ENT

Is this the correct layer? If not press NO. In this case we accept with ENT.

STD HA: VA:

P39 10:17 76.5600 86.5555

The instrument is now in theodolite mode. Aim at the first point and press A/M to start measurement.

A/M

See next page 4.3.197

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Measure

STD HA: VA: SD:

P39 10:17 76.5600 86.5555 32.685

REG

Press REG to check the points location according to the roadline.

STD Wait

P39 10:17

The program checks if the point lays close to any of the roadline sections (stations). If no section (station) is found INFO 32 will be displayed.

Layerinfo 10:17 Layer:1 Descr:LAYER1 LayerH:0.200

ENT

Here the layer information is displayed for the chosen section. Press ENT to proceed.

Ok? P39 10:17 Sect.: 804.318 Cl.ofs:-16.891 dELE: 0.052

ENT

The point lays 16.891m to the left of the roadline section (station) 804.318. If this is OK, press YES. If you answer NO, the program will check if the point lays close to any other section (station).

See next page 4.3.198

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Measure

STD

P39 10:17

Pcode=DITCH

Here you have the opportunity to choose a point code for the measured point.

ENT

P39 10:17 more ?

NO

Do you wish to continue measuring more points, press ENT. Otherwise press NO and you will return to the main menu. In this case we exit with NO.

4.3.199

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Slope staking
This option is used to find out where the ground level intersects with the finished road and to set out embankment sides. The heights cannot be deselected, which means that the height curve for the centre line of the road must exist to be able to run this option, (area files nn#1, nn#2, #3, #4, #5 are required). First you have to select the section (station) to work at. The program will calculate N, E, ELE using Cl.Offset=0, and the last point in the cross section. This results in that a reference line will be drawn between these two points in the horizontal plane. During the survey you will get continuous information about Radofs (Cl.Offset), RT.ofs (Deviation from section (station)) and dELE (Deviation from stored cross section). When dELE is zero the Catch point is found. The surveyor can press REG when he thinks he is close enough to the point.
Slope stake Centre line Catch pnt

39 PRG 39

Slope stake

Reference line Roadline Calculated height

.o RT Ra fs

Measured point

4.3.200

do

fs

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

Slope stake
PRG PRG 39

3
ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT until this display appears.

Slope stake

Roadl. 3D 10:17 4 Measure 5 Slope stake 6 Ref.Point

5
ENT

Select 5 Slope stake and press ENT.

P39 10:17 Job no=_

ENT

Key in the Job file in which you wish to store the measured points data and press ENT.

P39 10:17 1 Xmem OFF 2 Imem OFF 3 Serial OFF

2
ENT

Select in which memory unit you wish to store the Job file and press ENT. In this case we select 2 Imem.

P39 10:17 Stn=_

ENT

Is this the station you chose when you ran program 20, prior to P39? If no station establishment has been made, P39 will automatically start P20. It is impossible to start with setting out before you have established your instrument. In this example we accept the station and press ENT.

See next page 4.3.201

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Slope stake

P39 10:17 Area=_

Key in the name of the area file in which the roadline data is stored and press ENT.

ENT

Sel. dev. 10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

2

Select in what type of device the roadline data is stored. In this case we choose 2 Imem.

P39 10:17 SH=_

ENT

Enter the signal height and press ENT.

P39 10:17 Ht.Ofs=_

ENT

Key in a boning (guide stake) height if you wish to move up the measured point on the rod and press ENT.

See next page 4.3.202

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Slope stake

P39 10:17 Roadline check Please wait

The program checks your chosen roadline. Please wait.

P39 10:17 SecInc=

ENT

Select which section interval you shall have in this roadline and press ENT. If you choose this interval when you stored the roadline, the program selects that value.

P39 10:17 Sect.=

ENT

Do you know which section (station) is closest to the point you are looking for you can key in this and press ENT. Otherwise you leave the line blank and press ENT and let the program calculate in the closest section (station) to your present position. You are now in theodolite mode and can start measuring. Aim at the prism to start the measurement.

TRK HA: VA:

P39 10:17 39.8975 120.8995

See next page 4.3.203

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Slope stake

TRK HA: VA: SD:

P39 10:17 39.8975 120.8995 9.00

REG

When the distance has been measured, press REG to check the point you stand at.

P39 10:17 Sect: OK ?

ENT

The program suggests a section (station) on the roadline. Accept this section with ENT or press NO to look for another section.

P39 10:17 Sect.=

Select an even section (station) or accept the suggested section (station). In this case we accept the suggested section with ENT.

ENT

TRK HA: VA:

P39 10:17

Aim at the prism to see how you lie relative to the current cross section.

See next page 4.3.204

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Slope stake

TRK P39 10:17 Radofs: RT.ofs: dELE:

ENT

Here you can see how you lie relative to the cross section. When both RT.ofs and dELE are zero you have found the cross section and can mark your Catch pnt. Press ENT to see the coordinates for the point or REG to continue with the next point.

TRK N: E: ELE:

P39 10:17
Press REG to store the point.

REG

P39 10:17 Pcode=

Here you have an opportunity to store a point code for the measured point.

ENT

P39 10:17 more ?

Do you wish to continue looking for new points press ENT and you can key in the section (station). In this case we choose to exit with NO.

NO

4.3.205

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Reference Point
The program can be used to mark out the road design with bonings (guide stakes), i.e. rods with height marks for the road embankments. This is practical in those cases you have to dig the cut slope or place material to create the fill, when the bonings (guide stakes) have to be located outside the road embankment. The program can both be used for setting out and surveying reference points along the roadline.

39 PRG 39

Ref. pnt.

Setout
When setting out the operator enters the point code for the road embankment or the section (station) and centre line offset for the reference point, i.e. first the road embankment and then a distance to where the reference point should be located. See fig. below. The program uses the direction of the line sloping from the previous break point in the cross section. Note! dELE runs with the slope of the roadway.
Centre line Point 1 Distance RefPoint

Boning height*

Point code= Road embankment Def. point

*Guide stake height

For highways the distance can have to be entered with a negative sign for the road embankment closest the centre line if this lies in the middle of the two roadhalves. This reference point must be located a bit inside the roadway if you wish to have a correct height, depending on that the program otherwise will use the embankment slope. Setting out two reference heights on the same rod. The program also gives you the opportunity of setting out two reference points on the same rod. Default is that reference point 1 indicates one road embankment and that reference point 2 indicates the other. See fig. on next side.
4.3.206

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

RefPoint2

Centre line
Ref. pnt.

RefPoint1

dELE

Distance

Boning height*

Point code= Road embankment 2 Def. point

Point code= Road embankment 1 Def. point

*Guide stake height

Measuring
When measuring the operator enters the section (station) and centre line offset for the def. point. Then you measure a optional number of reference points, see fig. below.

Ref. point no. 1

Ref. point no. 2 P1

Ref. point no. 3 Centre line

DHT=0

def.pnt 4.3.207

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Reference Point - Setout

PRG PRG 39

3
ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT until this display appears.

Ref. pnt. Setout

Roadl. 3D 10:17 4 Measure 5 Slope stake 6 Ref.Point

6
ENT

Select 6 Ref.Point and press ENT.

P39 10:17 Job no=_

ENT

Key in the Job file in which you wish to store data for the reference points and press ENT.

P39 10:17 1 Xmem OFF 2 Imem OFF 3 Serial OFF

2
ENT

Select in which memory unit you wish to store data and press ENT. In this case we select 2 Imem.

P39 10:17 Stn=_

ENT

Is this the station you chose when you ran program 20, prior to P39? If no station establishment has been made, P39 will automatically start P20. It is impossible to start with setting out before you have established your instrument. In this example we accept the station and press ENT.

See next page 4.3.208

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Setout

P39 10:17 Area=_

Key in the name of the area file in which the roadline data is stored and press ENT.

ENT

Sel. dev. 1 Xmem 2 Imem

2

10:17

Select in what type of device the roadline data is stored. In this case we choose 2 Imem.

P39 10:17 SH=_

Enter the signal height and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Pcode=

ENT

Key in the point code for the definition point that has the correct centre line offset and press ENT, or leave the line blank to enter the Centre line offset manually.

See next page 4.3.209

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Setout

P39 10:17 Roadline check Please wait

The program checks your chosen roadline. Please wait.

P39 10:17 SecInc=

ENT

Select which section interval you shall have in this roadline and press ENT. If you chose this interval when you stored the roadline, the program selects that value.

Note Setout

P39 10:17 1 Setout 2 Measure 3 Exit

1

Select 1 to set out reference points, 2 to measure reference points or 3 to end program. In this case we select 1 Setout.

P39 10:17 HT.Ofs=

ENT

Key in a boning (guide stake) height if you wish to move up the setout point on the rod and press ENT.

See next page 4.3.210

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Setout

P39 10:17 Dual elevations?

Press ENT if you wish to set out two elevations on the same rod. In this case we press NO to set out only one point.

NO

P39 10:17 Sect.=_

ENT

Do you know which section (station) is closest to the point you are about to set out you can key in this and press ENT. Otherwise you leave the line blank and press ENT and let the program calculate the closest section (station) to your position.

STD HA: VA:

P39 10:17

Aim at the prism and press the A/Mkey to start the measurement.

A/M

STD HA: VA: SD:

P39 10:17
Press REG to store the measurement.

REG

See next page 4.3.211

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Setout

STD

P39 10:17

Sect.= OK?
ENT

The program suggests a section (station) on the roadline. Accept this section (station) with ENT or press NO to look for another section (station).

P39 10:17 Sect.=

Select an even section (station) or accept the suggested section (station). In this case we accept the suggested section (station) with ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Cl.Ofs=

ENT

If you have keyed in the point code for the definition point the program suggests a centre line offset. Otherwise you will have to key in the correct centre line offset. Press ENT or key in a new value.

Ok? P39 10:17 Sect.= Cl.ofs= Pcode=

ENT

Is the definition point data OK? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO. In this case we press ENT.

See next page 4.3.212

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Setout

P39 10:17 Pno=

Key in a number for the reference point you are going to set out.

ENT

P39 10:17 Dist.=

ENT

Key in the distance that is valid between the definition point and the point you are going to set out and press ENT.

TRK HA: dHA:

P39 10:17

The program automatically adopts TRK-mode. Aim to the prism to start the measurement.

TRK dHA: dHD: dHT:

P39 10:17

REG

See next page

As soon as the prism comes within the measurement beam you will see dHD,i.e. how much you must change the horizontal distance from the instrument. +=increase -=decrease When you think that you are close enough to zero, press REG to register the point or press ENT if you wish to set out with the radial/ right angle offset method.

4.3.213

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Setout of 2 pnt.

P39 10:17 more?

Do you wish to set out more reference points for this section press ENT and you are able to key in a new point number and a new distance. In this case we press NO.

NO

P39 10:17 New def.pnt?

NO

Do you wish to set out new reference points for another section press ENT. That means that you are able to key in a new section (station) number. In this case we choose to exit with NO, in order to set out two reference points.

P39 10:17 1 Setout 2 Measure 3 Exit

1

Select 1 to set out reference points,2 to measure reference points or 3 to end program. In this case we select 1 Setout.

P39 10:17 Ht.Ofs=

ENT

Key in a boning (guide stake) height if you wish to move up the setout point on the rod and press ENT.

See next page 4.3.214

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Setout of 2 pnt.

P39 10:17 Dual elevations?

Press ENT if you wish to set out two elevations on the same rod. In this case we press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 Sect.=

ENT

Do you know which section (station) is closest to the point you are about to set out you can key in this and press ENT. Otherwise you leave the line blank and press ENT and let the program calculate the closest section (station) to your position.

STD HA: VA:

P39 10:17

Aim at the prism and press the A/Mkey to start the measurement.

ENT

STD HA: VA: SD:

P39 10:17
Press REG to store the measurement.

ENT

See next page 4.3.215

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Setout of 2 pnt.

P39 10:17 Sect.= OK?

ENT

The program suggests the section (station) that lies closest to the measured point. Accept this section (station) with ENT or press NO to key in a new section (station).

P39 10:17 Sect.=

ENT

Select an even section (station) or accept the suggested section (station). In this case we accept the suggested section (station) with ENT.

P39 10:17 Cl.ofs=

ENT

If you have keyed in the point code for the definition point the program suggests a centre line offset. Otherwise you will have to key in the correct centre line offset. Press ENT or key in a new value.

Ok? P39 10:17 Sect.= Cl.ofs= Pcode=

ENT

Is the definition point data OK? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO. In this case we press ENT.

See next page 4.3.216

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Setout of 2 pnt.

P39 10:17 Pno=

Key in a number for the reference point you are going to set out.

ENT

P39 10:17 Dist.=

ENT

Key in the distance that is valid between the definition point and the point you are going to set out and press ENT.

TRK HA: dHA:

P39 10:17

The program automatically adopts TRK-mode. Aim to the prism to start the measurement.

See next page

4.3.217

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page As soon as the prism comes within the measurement beam you will see dHD,i.e. how much you must change the horizontal distance from the instrument. +=increase -=decrease When you think that you are close enough to zero, press REG to register the point or press ENT if you wish to set out with the radial/ right angle offset method. The program suggests the centre line offset for the other road half which is valid for the second definition point. Press ENT.

Ref. pnt. Setout of 2 pnt.

TRK dHA: dHD: dHT:

P39 10:17

REG

P39 10:17 Cl.ofs=-X.XX

ENT

Ok? P39 10:17 Sect.= Cl.ofs= Pcode=

ENT

Is the definition point data OK? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO. In this case we press ENT.

P39 10:17 dELE=

Here is the difference in height between the first and the second reference point. Press ENT.

ENT

See next page 4.3.218

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Setout of 2 pnt.

P39 10:17 New def.pnt?

Do you wish to set out more reference points for another section (station) press ENT and you are able to key in a new section (station) number. In this case we press NO.

NO

P39 10:17 1 Setout 2 Measure 3 Exit

3

Select 1 to set out reference points, 2 to measure reference points or 3 to end program. In this case we select 3 Exit.

4.3.219

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Reference Point - Measure

PRG PRG 39

3
ENT

9 Select program 39 and press ENT until this display appears.

Ref. pnt. Measure

Roadl. 3D 10:17 4 Measure 5 Slope stake 6 Ref.Point

6
ENT

Select 6 Ref.Point and press ENT.

P39 10:17 Job no=_

Key in the Job file in which you wish to store data for the reference points and press ENT.

ENT

P39 10:17 1 Xmem OFF 2 Imem OFF 3 Serial OFF

2
ENT

Select in which memory unit you wish to store data and press ENT. In this case we select 2 Imem.

P39 10:17 Stn=1

ENT

Is this the station you chose when you ran program 20, prior to P39? If no station establishment has been made, P39 will automatically start P20. It is impossible to start with setting out before you have established your instrument. In this example we accept the station and press ENT.

See next page 4.3.220

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Measure

P39 10:17 Area=_

Key in the name of the area file in which the roadline data is stored and press ENT.

ENT

Sel. dev. 10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

2

Select in what type of device the roadline data is stored. In this case we choose 2 Imem.

P39 10:17 SH=_

ENT

Enter the signal height and press ENT.

P39 10:17 Pcode=

Key in the point code for the def. point that has the correct centre line offset and press ENT, or leave the line blank to enter the Centre line offset manually.

ENT

See next page 4.3.221

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Measure

P39 10:17 Roadline check Please wait

ENT

The program checks your chosen roadline. Please wait.

P39 10:17 Sec.Inc=

Select which section interval you shall have in this roadline and press ENT. If you choose this interval when you stored the roadline, the program selects that value.

ENT

Note Measure

P39 10:17 1 Setout 2 Measure 3 Exit

2

Select 1 to set out reference points, 2 to measure reference points or 3 to end program. In this case we select 2 Measure.

P39 10:17 Sect.=

ENT

Do you know which section (station) is closest to the point you are looking for you can key in this and press ENT. Otherwise you leave the line blank and press ENT and let the program calculate the section (station) closes to your position.

See next page 4.3.222

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Measure

STD HA: VA:

P39 10:17
Aim to the prism and press A/M to start the measurement.

A/M

STD HA: VA: SD:

P39 10:17

When the distance has been measured, press REG to check the point you stand at.

REG

P39 10:17 Sect.= OK?

ENT

The program suggests a section (station) on the roadline. Accept this section (station) with ENT or press NO to look for another section (station).

P39 10:17 Sect.=

Select an even section (station) or accept the suggested section (station). In this case we accept the suggested section (station) with ENT.

ENT

See next page 4.3.223

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Measure

P39 10:17 Cl.ofs=

If you have keyed in the point code for the definition point the program suggests a centre line offset. Otherwise you will have to key in the correct centre line offset. Press ENT or key in a new value.

ENT

Ok? P39 10:17 Sect.= Cl.ofs= Pcode=

ENT

Is the definition point data OK? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO. In this case we press ENT.

P39 10:17 Pno=

ENT

Key in a number for the reference point.

See next page

4.3.224

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Measure

STD HA: VA:

P39 10:17

Aim at the prism and press A/M to start the measurement.

A/M

STD HA: VA: SD:

P39 10:17

When the prism has been found, press REG to register the measurement.

REG

Ok? P39 10:17 HA: HD: dELE:

ENT

Here you can see the correct bearing for the measured point, the distance and the difference in height from the reference point. Press ENT to accept this or NO to ignore.

P39 10:17 more?

NO

Do you wish to measure more reference points for the current section press ENT and you are able to key in a new point number. In this case we press NO.

4.3.225

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D
PRG 39

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

Ref. pnt. Measure

P39 10:17 New def.pnt?

Do you wish to measure reference points for another section press ENT. That means that you are able to key in a new section number. In this case we choose to exit with NO.

NO

P39 10:17 1 Setout 2 Measure 3 Exit

3

Select 1 to set out reference points, 2 to measure reference points or 3 to end program. In this case we select 3 Exit.

4.3.226

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 39

PROGRAM 39 - ROADLINE 3D

The list below shows which data will be stored after registration. See the configuration part if you wish to store other data. Job file 3 Setout
Section Centre line offs. ELE Layer Layerheight Ht.Ofs. dN dE dELE 80 83 39 86 87 36 40 41 42

Registered data

Label

Job file 6 Reference pnt

1 Setout, one ref. point
Section Centre line offs. Pno Ht.Ofs Distance dN dE dELE

Label

80 83 5 36 89 40 41 42

4 Measure
Section Centre line offs. dELE Pcode Layer Layerheight N E ELE 80 83 42 4 86 87 37 38 39

1 Setout, two ref. points

Same data as for one ref. point + Centre line offs. dELE

83 42

2 Measure
Section Centre line offs. E Pno HA HD dELE 80 83 39 5 7 11 42

5 Slopestake
Section Pcode Ht.Ofs Radofs RT.ofs dELE N E ELE 80 4 36 72 73 42 37 38 39

4.3.227

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 27

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

Program 27 - Moving Coordinates Forward

Moving Coordinates Forward is a program for moving coordinates forward from a known station. Please note that no calculations will be performed, but the program will store everything in the memory for later PC processing.

4.3.228

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 27

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

Program 27 - Moving Coordinates Forward

PRG 27 ENT

How to use

P27 10:16 Job no =

2
ENT

Here you key in the number or name of the Job file in which you wish to store your traverse data. A list of data stored in the selected Job file can be seen on page 4.3.240. Select, for example, Job no = 2.

P27 10:17 1. Xmem off 2. Imem off 3. Serial off

2
ENT

Where will you store your Job file? Choose a suitable memory unit by indicating 1, 2 or 3 for activation/ deactivation. Then press ENT. Here we have chosen to work with the internal memory.

P27 10:17 Stn=

1101 ENT

Key in your station number.

P27 10:17 Pcode =

ENT

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the station point. If you don't wish to have any Pcode leave the line blank and press ENT.

Note ! Known Station+ is described on page 4.3.12

P27 10:17 1 Known station 2 Known station+

1

Here you select if you want to use "known station" with one reference object or "known station+" with more reference objects. In this example we'll chose "1 Known station". Press 1. 4.3.229

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

From previous page

PRG 27

How to use Known stn

P27 10:17 Area =

2
ENT

Key in the name of the Area file in which you have stored your station point and your reference object. If you leave the line blank you are able to enter the coordinates manually.

Sel device10:17 1 Xmem 2 Imem

2 If you left "Area=" blank you're taken here
Note ! Enter the coordinates manually

In which memory unit is your Area file stored? In our example, we are using the internal memory (Imem).

Enter the coordinates manually Enter your station coordinates. Leave the ELE blank for no height establishment.

Coord 10:17 N=xxxx E=xxxx ELE=xx

ENT

Stn ok ? N=xxxx E=xxxx ELE=xx

See next page.

Are your coordinates correct? Press Yes (ENT) to accept them. If you press No you will return to the question about Stn= and Area=. If the coordinates have to be changed, use Edit or P43 (Enter Coordinates). In this example we will continue by accepting them.

4.3.230

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

From previous page.

PRG ENT 27

How to use Note ! Only shown if your coordinates includes ELE.

HT measure ?
ENT

Are you going to measure heights? Accept this question by pressing ENT (Yes). If you decide not to measure heights (press No) it means that the instrument height (IH) and signal height (SH) will be ignored. In this example, we will be measuring heights. Press ENT.

10:18
Note ! Only shown if your coordinates includes ELE.

Enter your instrument height (IH). For example, 1.75.

IH =
1.75 ENT

Key in the Pno of your reference object. For example, 1102.

RefObj=
1102 ENT

Area =
ENT

Key in the name of the Area file in which you have stored your reference object. If you leave the line blank you will have the opportunity to enter the coordinates manually in the same way as for the station coordinates.

Ref ok ? N=xxxx E=xxxx ELE =xx

See next page

Are your coordinates correct? Press ENT to accept them. If you press No you return to the question Ref.Obj=. If they have to be changed, use Edit or P43 (Enter Coordinates). We will continue by accepting them. 4.3.231

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

From previous page

PRG ENT 27

How to use

Aim at refobj Press A/M

A/M

Aim at your reference object. Then press the A/M key.

STD P27 10:18 HAref:xx.xxxx HA: xx.xxxx REG=Exit

ENT

HAref is the calculated bearing between the station point and the reference object. If you wish to check the distance to the reference object, press ENT. Otherwise press REG to store the station establishment and exit.

STD P27 10:18 SHD: xxx.xxx HD : REG=Exit

A/M

If the reference object is marked with a reflector, you can also check the horizontal distance by pressing the A/M key. Otherwise press REG to store the station establishment and exit.

Note ! Press REG

STD P27 10:19 SHD: xxx.xxx HD : xxx.xxx REG=Exit

REG

Here you can compare the calculated distance with the actual measured distance. Press REG to store station establishment in the Job file you have chosen (see page 4.3.229). Note ! The REG key must always be used if you want to store the station establishment. Press REG to continue with Program 27. 4.3.232

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 27

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

Foresight measurement
From previous page

Foresight measurement

P27 10:19 1 Foresight 2 Refobj. 3 Other

1

Choose 1 Foresight. See page 4.3.235 for Other. Choose option 2 Refobj. if you wish to measure more angles. (Not first shot!)

P27 10:19 Pno=

2
ENT

Key in the foresight point number.

P27 10:19 Pcode=

ENT

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the foresight point. If you don't wish to have any Pcode leave the line blank and press ENT.

P27 10:19 SH=

ENT

Enter the signal height.

See next page. 4.3.233

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

From previous page.

PRG 27

Foresight measurement

STD 10:21 HA:xxx.xxx VA:xxx.xxx

A/M

The instrument is now in theodolite position and is ready to measure. Aim at the chosen target. Press the A/M key to measure the distance. Note ! It is possible to measure in all modes (STD, FSTD, TRK, D-bar) and in both faces. The instrument displays HA, VA and SD for your first point. Your measurement can now be registered. Press the REG key. See page 4.3.241 for a list of what is stored in the memory. Do you wish to measure more points press YES. Press NO to exit the program. Answer NO to the question "End" if you're not finished.

STD 10:21 HA:xxx.xxx VA:xxx.xxx SD:xxx.xx

REG

P27 10:21 more ?

NO

YES

P27 10:21 End ?

P27 10:21 1 Foresight 2 Refobj. 3 Other

See next page

See page 4.3.238

4.3.234

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 27

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

Other measurement
From previous page

Other measurement

P27 10:19 1 Foresight 2 Refobj. 3 Other

3

Choose 3 Other See page 4.3.233 for Foresight.

P27 10:19 1 Benchmark 2 Close 3 Sideshot

Note ! The available menu choices 1 below does not perform any calculations, but will only store Enter the benchinforma- mark elevation for tion in the point memory for later ENT computer processing.

Choose measuring mode.

P27 10:19 BM ELE=

See next page

P27 10:19 Active=

Enter the activity code for the sideshot.
ENT

See page 4.3.237

See page 4.3.237

4.3.235

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

From previous page

27

P27 10:19 1 External 2 Internal 3 Other

3

Choose the method to close the traverse.

1 or 2

P27 10:19 1 Point to point 2 Open

See next page

See next page

Close External (CE)

Close Internal (CI)

Point to point (P)

Open (O)

4.3.236

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 27

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

Other measurement

P27 10:19 Pno=

2
ENT

Enter the point number.

P27 10:19 Pcode=

ENT

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the point. If you don't wish to have any Pcode leave the line blank and press ENT.

P27 10:21 SH=

ENT

Enter the signal height.

STD 10:21 HA:xxx.xxx VA:xxx.xxx

A/M

The instrument is now in theodolite position and is ready to measure. Aim at the chosen target. Press the A/M key to measure the distance. Note ! It is possible to measure in all modes (STD, FSTD, TRK, D-bar) and in both faces. The instrument displays HA, VA and SD for your first point. Your measurement can now be registered. Press the REG key. See page 4.3.242 for a list of what is stored in the memory 4.3.237

STD 10:21 HA:xxx.xxx VA:xxx.xxx SD:xxx.xx

REG

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 27

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

Other measurement

P27 10:21 more ?

Do you wish to measure more points press YES. Press NO to exit the program. Answer NO to the question "End" if you're not finished.

NO

YES

Note ! This question will not appear if you have chosen to close.

P27 10:21 End ?

P27 10:21 1 Foresight 2 Refobj. 3 Other

If you wish to re-measure a foresight point press 1. You will then get an info message "Info 55" and a question "New foresight". Press 3 to measure other points.

NO

P0 10:21 Temp=20.0_

The instrument returns to program 0. See next page for instructions of how to start the program on the next station.

See next page

4.3.238

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 27 PRG 27

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

Start program 27

Next station

P27 10:21 1 New 2 Continue

2

Choose 1 if you wish to start a new or choose 2 if you wish to continue with the old.

P27 10:21 Aim at refobj Press A/M

A/M

Aim at your reference object and press A/M.

STD P27 10:21 HA:xxx.xx VA:xxx.xx

REG

Press A/M and REG if distance is to be measured, otherwise press only REG.

See page 4.3.231

4.3.239

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 27

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

Job file

Comments First Station using one reference object

Registered data

Text Label Activity OS 61 Pno (STN) 5 Pcode 4 IH 3 Coordinates 37,38,39 Activity RO 61 Pno (Ref.Obj) 5 Coordinates 37,38,39 HA_ref 21 Raw data 7,8,(9)

Description Station data Stored if entered Stored if heights are included 39 if heights are included Reference object data 39 if heights are included (Set HA) Stored if distance is measured

First Station using more than one reference object

Text Label Stn 2 Coordinates 37,38,39 Pno (STN) 5 SH (6) Coordinates 37,38,39 Raw data 7,8,(9) Pno . Info, Weighting 0 Info, Diff HA 0 Info, Point list 0 Pno 5 (dHD) (76) dHA 45 Pno . Activity OS 61 Pno (STN) 5 Pcode 4 IH 3 Coordinates 37,38,39 Activity RO 61 Pno Blank 5 Coordinates, 0.000 37,38,(39) HA_ref 21 Raw data 7,8,(9) Description Point number for station 39 if heights are included First point 39 if heights are included Polar data Like first point

First point Deviation from true HD Like first point Occupied Station

Reference Object no number Values = 0.000 Instrument direction when exiting Station Establishment

4.3.240

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 27

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

Job file

Comments Next Station

Registered data

Text Activity OS Pno (STN) Pcode IH N (STN) E (STN) ELE (STN) Activity RO Pno (Ref.Obj) Pcode SH N (RO) E (RO) ELE (RO) HA_ref HA VA SD HAII VAII HAI VAI

Label 61 5 4 3 37 38 39 61 5 4 6 37 38 39 21 7 8 9 17 18 24 25

Description Station data Stored if entered Stored if heights are included

Stored if heights are included Reference object data Stored if entered Stored if heights are included

Stored if heights are included Stored if distance is not measured

Stored if distance is measured Stored if measured in two faces (STD, D-bar) Stored if measured in two faces (D-bar) -"-

Foresight
Text Activity FS Pno Pcode SH N E ELE HA VA SD HAII VAII HAI VAI Label 61 5 4 6 37 38 39 7 8 9 17 18 24 25 Description Foresight data Stored if entered Stored if heights are measured

Stored if heights are measured

Stored if measured in two faces (STD, Dbar) Stored if measured in two faces (D-bar) -"-

4.3.241

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 27

PROGRAM 27 - MOVING COORDINATES FORWARD

Job file

Comments Benchmark, Sideshot, Close

Registered data

Text Activity * Pno Pcode SH BM ELE N E ELE HA VA SD HAII VAII HAI VAI

Label 61 5 4 6 31 37 38 39 7 8 9 17 18 24 25

Description

Stored if entered Stored if heights are measured Store if BM ELE has been chosen

Stored if heights are measured

Stored if measured in two faces (STD, D-bar) Stored if measured in two faces (D-bar) -"* Activity codes: Sideshot = optional Benchmark = BM Close: External = CE Internal = CI Point to point = P Open = O

Refobj.
Text Activity RO Pno Pcode SH N E ELE HA VA SD HAII VAII HAI VAI Label 61 5 4 6 37 38 39 7 8 9 17 18 24 25 Description Reference object data Stored if entered Stored if heights are measured

Stored if heights are measured

Stored if distance is measured Stored if measured in two faces (STD, Dbar) Stored if measured in two faces (D-bar) -"-

4.3.242

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

Program 61 - COGO
In general 1-Line intersections 1.1-Intersection between lines 1.2-Offset intersection 1.3-Offset through points 1.4-Right angle intersection 2-Curve intersections 2.1-Points on a curve 2.2-Curve intersection 3-Miscellaneous 3.1-Perpendicular offset 3.2-Centre of circle 3.3-Station and offset 3.4-Angle and distance Configuration 4.3.244 4.3.246 4.3.246 4.3.252 4.3.259 4.3.267 4.3.275 4.3.275 4.3.281 4.3.286 4.3.286 4.3.291 4.3.296 4.3.301 4.3.306

4.3.243

PROGRAM 61 - COGO
PRG 61 PRG 61

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

In general
Program 61, COGO, is calculation program for solving coordinate calculations in field or in the office. It is divided into three main sections, Line intersections, Curve intersections and Miscellaneous. These sections then include a number of subsections depending on the current condition and the type of base information you have. The program also includes a general Configuration part which configures the program behaviour. Please go through this part before you start. When you have calculated a point you can also set it out without leaving the program.To help you understand the different calculation programs, we have choosen to illustrate these by the following figures:
7

In general

2 5

1.1 - Intersection between lines

7
7

1.2 Offset intersection

2 5 4
5

2 4 3

1.3 Offset through points

1

1.4 Right angle intersect.

5 3

2.1 Points on a curve

1

2.2 Curve intersection

5 3

5 3

3.1 Perpendicular offset

1

3.2 Centre of a circle

1

5
5

3.3 Station and offset

3.4 Angle and distance

4.3.244

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

Coordinate list
In the following examples we have chosen to use an example from real life. Here below you can find a list of the point coordinates:

In general

Pno 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

N 88345.862 88343.971 88313.151 88296.446 88279.753 88273.289 88276.149

E 99136.879 99153.527 99157.173 99155.277 99153.375 99145.428 99120.184

Fetching point data from an Area file

In the following examples you can use pre-stored point data. You will then be prompted to enter in which Area file these points are stored and in which memory device, Imem, Cardmem or Xmem. To speed up this process you can configure the program to use the first entered Area and memory for the following points. To simplify the manual and also to use less paper, we have chosen not to show every display that concerns the Area and memory. Instead of these displays we will show the following text block. This means that you are able to key in the Area file you wish to fetch point coordinates from and also to enter in which memory device this file is stored:

Enter Area & Select device

4.3.245

PROGRAM 61 - COGO
PRG

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Line intersections
Point C
7

61 PRG 61

Line intersections

Point A Calculated point

1

Point B
5 2

Point D

1.1 - Intersection between lines

This program calculates the intersection between the lines A-B and C-D.
PRG

6
ENT

Select program 61 and press ENT.

Select 10:17 1 Line intersec. 2 Curve inters. 3 Miscellaneous

1

Select 1 (Line intersec.).

Select 10:17 1 Int. b/w lines 2 Offs.intersec. 3 Offs. thr. pts

1 See next page

Select 1 (Int. b/w lines)

4.3.246

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

1.1-Intersection between lines

P61 10:17 Point A Pno=_

1
ENT

Key in the point number for point A and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Area=_

1
ENT

Key in the name of the Area file in which the points are stored and press ENT. If you wish to key in the coordinates manually, leave the line blank and press ENT. In this case we have stored the points in Area no 1.

Sel.dev. 10:17 1 Imem 2 Xmem

2
ENT

Select in which memory unit you have stored the Area file and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88345.862 E=99136.879

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

See next page

4.3.247

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

1.1-Intersection between lines

P61 10:17 Point B Pno=_

5
ENT

Key in the point number for point B and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88279.753 E=99153.375

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point C Pno=_

7
ENT

Key in the point number for point C and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.248

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

1.1-Intersection between lines

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88276.149 E=99120.184

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point D Pno=_

2
ENT

Key in the point number for point D and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

See next page

4.3.249

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

1.1-Intersection between lines

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88343.971 E=99153.527

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 N=88322.145 E=99142.797 Store?

ENT

This is the calculated point coordinates. Press ENT to store the point or NO to cancel.

P61 10:17 Pno=_

ENT

Key in a number for the calculated point and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Area=_

ENT

Key in the name of the Areafile in which you wish to store the calculated point and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.250

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

1.1-Intersection between lines

P61 10:17 Pcode=

ENT

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the calculated point. In this case we choose the call the point "TP".

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=?

ENT

Do you wish to add an elevation to the point before you store it? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO.

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=12.125

ENT

Accept the keyed in elevation with ENT or press NO to reenter it.

P61 10:17 Point stored

Select 10:17 1 Int. b/w lines 2 Offs.intersec. 3 Offs. thr. pts

Now you return to the Line intersection menu. If you wish to step to the main menu, press 6.

4.3.251

PROGRAM 61 - COGO
PRG

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Dis
61
7

t. fr

om

1.2-Offset intersection

Point C

CD

Calculated point Point A

1

Dist.
5

from

AB
2

Point B

Point D

1.2 - Offset intersection

This program calculates the intersection between the lines A-B and C-D if they are dislocated with two offsets, Dist. from AB and Dist. from CD.
PRG

6
ENT

Select program 61 and press ENT.

Select 10:17 1 Line intersec. 2 Curve inters. 3 Miscellaneous

1

Select 1 (Line intersec.).

Select 10:17 1 Int. b/w lines 2 Offs.intersec. 3 Offs. thr. pts

2 See next page

Select 2 (Offs. intersec.)

4.3.252

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

1.2-Offset intersection

P61 10:17 Point A Pno=_

1
ENT

Key in the point number for point A and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88345.862 E=99136.879

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point B Pno=_

5
ENT

Key in the point number for point B and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.253

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

1.2-Offset intersection

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88279.753 E=99153.375

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Offs. intersec. Dist. from AB Dist.=

1
ENT

Key in the offset, Dist. from AB and press ENT. A positive value means that you are dislocating the line at the right from point A. In this example we have chosen the offset +1m.

P61 10:17 Point C Pno=_

7
ENT

Key in the point number for point C and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.254

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

1.2-Offset intersection

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88276.149 E=99120.184

ENT

Press ENT to accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point D Pno=_

2
ENT

Key in the point number for point D and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

See next page

4.3.255

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

1.2-Offset intersection

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88343.971 E=99153.527

ENT

Press ENT to accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Offs. intersec. Dist. from CD Dist.=

1
ENT

Key in the offset, Dist. from CD and press ENT. A positive value means that you are dislocating the line at the right from point C. In this example we have chosen the offset -1m.

P61 10:17 N=88322.258 E=99141.738 Store?

ENT

This is the calculated point coordinates. Press ENT to store the point or NO to cancel.

P61 10:17 Pno=_

ENT

Key in a number for the calculated point and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.256

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

1.2-Offset intersection

P61 10:17 Area=_

ENT

Key in the name of the Areafile in which you wish to store the calculated point and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Pcode=

ENT

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the calculated point. In this case we choose the call the point "TP".

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=?

ENT

Do you wish to add an elevation to the point before you store it? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO.

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=12.125

ENT

Accept the keyed in elevation with ENT or press NO to reenter it.

See next page

4.3.257

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

1.2-Offset intersection

P61 10:17 Point stored

Select 10:17 1 Int. b/w lines 2 Offs.intersec. 3 Offs. thr. pts

Now you return to the Line intersection menu. If you wish to step to the main menu, press 6.

4.3.258

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

7

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

PRG 61

Point C Point A
1

1.3-Offset through points

Point B
5

Point F

Point D
3

Point E

Calculated point

1.3 - Offset through points

This program calculates the intersection between the lines A-B and C-D if they are dislocated to the points E resp. F.
Select program 61 and press ENT.

PRG

6
ENT

Select 10:17 1 Line intersec. 2 Curve inters. 3 Miscellaneous

1

Select 1 (Line intersec.).

Select 10:17 1 Int. b/w lines 2 Offs.intersec. 3 Offs. thr. pts

3 See next page

Select 3 (Offs. thr. pts)

4.3.259

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

1.3-Offset through points

P61 10:17 Point A Pno=_

1
ENT

Key in the point number for point A and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88345.862 E=99136.879

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point B Pno=_

5
ENT

Key in the point number for point B and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.260

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

1.3-Offset through points

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88279.753 E=99153.375

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point E Pno=_

3
ENT

Key in the point number for point E and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

See next page

4.3.261

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

1.3-Offset through points

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88313.151 E=99157.173

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point C Pno=_

7
ENT

Key in the point number for point C and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88276.149 E=99120.184

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

See next page

4.3.262

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

1.3-Offset through points

P61 10:17 Point D Pno=_

2
ENT

Key in the point number for point D and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88343.971 E=99153.527

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point F Pno=_

4
ENT

Key in the point number for point F and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.263

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

1.3-Offset through points

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88296.446 E=99155.277

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 N=88304.628 E=99159.299 Store?

ENT

This is the calculated point coordinates. Press ENT to store the point or NO to cancel.

P61 10:17 Pno=_

ENT

Key in a number for the calculated point and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.264

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

1.3-Offset through points

P61 10:17 Area=_

ENT

Key in the name of the Areafile in which you wish to store the calculated point and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Pcode=

ENT

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the calculated point. In this case we choose the call the point "TP".

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=?

ENT

Do you wish to add an elevation to the point before you store it? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO.

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=12.125

ENT

Accept the keyed in elevation with ENT or press NO to reenter it.

See next page

4.3.265

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

1.3-Offset through points

P61 10:17 Point stored

Select 10:17 1 Int. b/w lines 2 Offs.intersec. 3 Offs. thr. pts

Now you return to the Line intersection menu. If you wish to step to the main menu, press 6.

4.3.266

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

Point C
PRG 61
7

1.4-Right angle ntersection

Calculated point

Point A
1

Point B
5 4

2 3

Point D

Point F

Point E

1.4 - Right angle intersection

This program calculates the intersection between the line going through point E, perpendicular to the line A-B, and the line going through point F, perpendicular to the line C-D.
PRG

6
ENT

Select program 61 and press ENT.

Select 10:17 1 Line intersec. 2 Curve inters. 3 Miscellaneous

1
ENT

Select 1 (Line intersec.) and press ENT.*

Select 10:17 4 Rt ang. int. 5 Config. 6 Main menu

4 See next page

Select 4 (Rt ang. int.)*

* You can also press 1 and 4 directly.

4.3.267

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

1.4-Right angle intersection

P61 10:17 Point A Pno=_

1
ENT

Key in the point number for point A and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88345.862 E=99136.879

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point B Pno=_

5
ENT

Key in the point number for point B and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.268

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

1.4-Right angle intersection

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88279.753 E=99153.375

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point E Pno=_

3
ENT

Key in the point number for point E and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

See next page

4.3.269

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

1.4-Right angle intersection

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88313.151 E=99157.173

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point C Pno=_

7
ENT

Key in the point number for point C and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88276.149 E=99120.184

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

See next page

4.3.270

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

1.4-Right angle intersection

P61 10:17 Point D Pno=_

2
ENT

Key in the point number for point D and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88343.971 E=99153.527

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point F Pno=_

4
ENT

Key in the point number for point F and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.271

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

1.4-Right angle intersection

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88296.446 E=99155.277

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 N=88307.213 E=99133.376 Store?

ENT

This is the calculated point coordinates. Press ENT to store the point or NO to cancel.

P61 10:17 Pno=_

ENT

Key in a number for the calculated point and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.272

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

1.4-Right angle intersection

P61 10:17 Area=_

ENT

Key in the name of the Areafile in which you wish to store the calculated point and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Pcode=

ENT

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the calculated point. In this case we choose the call the point "TP".

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=?

ENT

Do you wish to add an elevation to the point before you store it? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO.

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=12.125

ENT

Accept the keyed in elevation with ENT or press NO to reenter it.

See next page

4.3.273

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

1.4-Right angle intersection

P61 10:17 Point stored

Select 10:17 1 Int. b/w lines 2 Offs.intersec. 3 Offs. thr. pts

Now you return to the Line intersection menu. If you wish to step to the main menu, press 6.

4.3.274

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 61 PRG 61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

Curve intersections
Calculated point Calculated point
5 3 1

Point A

Curve intersections

Point B

Radius from C

Point C

2.1 - Points on a curve

This program calculates the intersection between the line A-B and the circle at the center of point C and with a radius of, "Radius from C".
PRG

6
ENT

Select program 61 and press ENT.

Select 10:17 1 Line intersec. 2 Curve inters. 3 Miscellaneous

2

Select 2 (Curve intersec.).

Select 10:17 1 Pts on a curve 2 Curve inters. 3 Config

1 See next page

Select 1 (Pts on a curve)

4.3.275

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

2.1-Points on a curve

P61 10:17 Point A Pno=_

1
ENT

Key in the point number for point A and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88345.862 E=99136.879

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point B Pno=_

5
ENT

Key in the point number for point B and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.276

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

2.1-Points on a curve

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88279.753 E=99153.375

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point C Pno=

3
ENT

Key in the point number for point C and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

See next page

4.3.277

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

2.1-Points on a curve

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88313.151 E=99157.173

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Radius from C Radius=

2 5
ENT

Key in the radius from C, and press ENT. If the radius is to small, that is if the circle does not intersect with the line AB, you will get an error message. In this example we key in 25m.

P61 10:17 N=88311.700 E=99140.412 Store?

NO

This is the first calculated point coordinates. Press ENT to store the point or NO to cancel. In this example we choose only to store the second point.

P61 10:17 N=88288.901 E=99151.092 Store?

ENT

This is the second calculated point coordinates. Press ENT to store the point or NO to cancel. In this example we choose to store it with ENT.

See next page

4.3.278

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

2.1-Points on a curve

P61 10:17 Pno=_

ENT

Key in a number for the calculated point and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Area=_

ENT

Key in the name of the Areafile in which you wish to store the calculated point and press ENT.

P61 10:17 1Pcode= 7 0:1 Pno=_

ENT

P61

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the calculated point. In this case we choose the call the point "TP".

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=?

ENT

Do you wish to add an elevation to the point before you store it? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO.

See next page

4.3.279

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

2.1-Points on a curve

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=12.125

ENT

Accept the keyed in elevation with ENT or press NO to reenter it.

P61 10:17 Point stored

Select 10:17 1 Pts on a curve 2 Curve inters. 3 Config

Now you return to the Curve intersection menu. If you wish to step to the main menu, press 4.

4.3.280

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

2.2-Curve intersection

Calculated point 1 Radius from B

5

Point A
1

Radius from A

Point B

Calculated point 2

2.2 - Curve intersection

This program calculates the intersection between the circle at the center of Point A and with a radius of "Radius from A", and the circle at the center of Point B and with a radius of "Radius from B".
PRG

6
ENT

Select program 61 and press ENT.

Select 10:17 1 Line intersec. 2 Curve inters. 3 Miscellaneous

2

Select 2 (Curve inters.)

Select 10:17 1 Pts on a curve 2 Curve inters. 3 Config

2 See next page

Select 2 (Curve inters.)

4.3.281

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

2.2-Curve intersection

P61 10:17 Point A Pno=_

1
ENT

Key in the point number for point A and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88345.862 E=99136.879

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point B Pno=_

5
ENT

Key in the point number for point B and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.282

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

2.2-Curve intersection

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88279.753 E=99153.375

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Curve inters. Radius from A Radius=

5 0
ENT

Key in the radius from A, and press ENT. In this example we key in 50m.

P61 10:17 Curve inters. Radius from B Radius=

2 0
ENT

Key in the radius from B and press ENT. In this example we key in 20m.

See next page

4.3.283

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

2.2-Curve intersection

P61 10:17 N=88296.111 E=99141.868 Store?

NO

This is the first calculated point coordinates. Press ENT to store the point or NO to cancel. In this example we choose only to store the second point.

P61 10:17 N=88299.599 E=99155.847 Store?

ENT

This is the second calculated point coordinates. Press ENT to store the point or NO to cancel. In this example we choose to store it with ENT.

P61 10:17 Pno=_

ENT

Key in a number for the calculated point and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Area=_

ENT

Key in the name of the Areafile in which you wish to store the calculated point and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.284

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

2.2-Curve intersection

P61 10:17 Pcode=

ENT

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the calculated point. In this case we choose the call the point "TP".

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=?

ENT

Do you wish to add an elevation to the point before you store it? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO.

P61 10:17 1Pcode=TP 0:17 ELE=12.125 Pno=_

ENT

P61
Accept the keyed in elevation with ENT or press NO to reenter it.

P61 10:17 Point stored

Select 10:17 1 Pts on a curve 2 Curve inters. 3 Config

Now you return to the Curve intersection menu. If you wish to step to the main menu, press 4. 4.3.285

PROGRAM 61 - COGO
PRG 61 PRG 61

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Miscellaneous
1

Point A Calculated point

3

Miscellaneous
5

Point B

Point C

3.1 - Perpendicular offset

This program calculates the intersection between the line A-B and the line perpendicular to line A-B going through point C.
PRG

6
ENT

Select program 61 and press ENT.

Select 10:17 1 Line intersec. 2 Curve inters. 3 Miscellaneous

3

Select 3 (Miscellaneous).

Select 10:17 1 Perpend.offset 2 Cent.of circle 3 Stn and offset

1

Select 1 (Perpend.offset)

See next page 4.3.286

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

3.1-Perpendicular offset

P61 10:17 Point A Pno=_

1
ENT

Key in the point number for point A and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88345.862 E=99136.879

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point B Pno=_

5
ENT

Key in the point number for point B and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.287

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

3.1-Perpendicular offset

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88279.753 E=99153.375

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point C Pno=_

3
ENT

Key in the point number for point C and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

See next page

4.3.288

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

3.1-Perpendicular offset

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88313.151 E=99157.173

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 N=88310.301 E=99145.752 Store?

ENT

This is the calculated point coordinates. Press ENT to store the point or NO to cancel.

P61 10:17 Pno=_

ENT

Key in a number for the calculated point and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Area=_

ENT

Key in the name of the Areafile in which you wish to store the calculated point and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.289

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

3.1-Perpendicular offset

P61 10:17 Pcode=

ENT

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the calculated point. In this case we choose the call the point "TP".

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=?

ENT

Do you wish to add an elevation to the point before you store it? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO.

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=12.125

ENT

Accept the keyed in elevation with ENT or press NO to reenter it.

P61 10:17 Point stored

Select 10:17 1 Perpend.offset 2 Cent.of circle 3 Stn and offset

Now you return to the Miscellaneous menu. If you wish to step to the main menu, press 6. 4.3.290

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

3.2-Center of circle

Calculated point

1 5
5

Point A

3
3

Point C

Point B

3.2 - Center of circle

This program calculates the center of a circle going through the points A, B and C.
PRG

6
ENT

Select program 61 and press ENT.

Select 10:17 1 Line intersec. 2 Curve inters. 3 Miscellaneous

3

Select 3 (Miscellaneous).

Select 10:17 1 Perpend.offset 2 Cent.of circle 3 Stn and offset

2 See next page

Select 2 (Cent.of circle)

4.3.291

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

3.2-Center of circle

P61 10:17 Point A Pno=_

1
ENT

Key in the point number for point A and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88345.862 E=99136.879

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point B Pno=_

3
ENT

Key in the point number for point B and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.292

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

3.2-Center of circle

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88313.151 E=99157.173

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point C Pno=_

5
ENT

Key in the point number for point C and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

See next page

4.3.293

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

3.2-Center of circle

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88279.753 E=99153.375

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 N=88302.364 E=99103.277 Store?

ENT

This is the calculated point coordinates. Press ENT to store the point or NO to cancel.

P61 10:17 Pno=_

ENT

Key in a number for the calculated point and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Area=_

ENT

Key in the name of the Areafile in which you wish to store the calculated point and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.294

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

3.2-Center of circle

P61 10:17 Pcode=

ENT

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the calculated point. In this case we choose the call the point "TP".

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=?

ENT

Do you wish to add an elevation to the point before you store it? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO.

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=12.125

ENT

Accept the keyed in elevation with ENT or press NO to reenter it.

P61 10:17 Point stored

Select 10:17 1 Perpend.offset 2 Cent.of circle 3 Stn and offset

Now you return to the Miscellaneous menu. If you wish to step to the main menu, press 6. 4.3.295

PROGRAM 61 - COGO
PRG 61

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Rado

fs

3.3-Station and offset

Calculated point

RT.of

Point A

Point B

3.3 - Station and offset

This program calculates a point which lies at an Right angle offset and a Radial offset from the line A-B.
PRG

6
ENT

Select program 61 and press ENT.

Select 10:17 1 Line intersec. 2 Curve inters. 3 Miscellaneous

3

Select 3 (Miscellaneous).

Select 10:17 1 Perpend.offset 2 Cent.of circle 3 Stn and offset

3

Select 3 (Stn and offset)

See next page 4.3.296

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

3.3-Station and offset

P61 10:17 Point A Pno=_

1
ENT

Key in the point number for point A and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88345.862 E=99136.879

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point B Pno=_

5
ENT

Key in the point number for point B and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.297

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

3.3-Station and offset

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88279.753 E=99153.375

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Stn and offset Radofs=_

3 0
ENT

Key in the radial offset from point A and press ENT. A positive value means that the offset is towards point B. In this example we have chosen the offset of +30m.

P61 10:17 Stn and offset Radofs=30 RT.ofs=_

1 0
ENT

Key in the right angle offset from point A and press ENT. A positive value means that the offset is at the right from point A. In this example we have chosen the offset of +10m.

See next page

4.3.298

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

3.3-Station and offset

P61 10:17 N=88310.301 E=99145.752 Store?

ENT

This is the calculated point coordinates. Press ENT to store the point or NO to cancel.

P61 10:17 Pno=_

ENT

Key in a number for the calculated point and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Area=_

ENT

Key in the name of the Areafile in which you wish to store the calculated point and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Pcode=

ENT

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the calculated point. In this case we choose the call the point "TP".

See next page

4.3.299

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

3.3-Station and offset

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=?

ENT

Do you wish to add an elevation to the point before you store it? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO.

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=12.125

ENT

Accept the keyed in elevation with ENT or press NO to reenter it.

P61 10:17 Point stored

Select 10:17 1 Perpend.offset 2 Cent.of circle 3 Stn and offset

Now you return to the Miscellaneous menu. If you wish to step to the main menu, press 6.

4.3.300

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 61

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

Calculated point
Dist. from A
1

3.4-Angle and distance

Angle

Point A

Point B

3.4 - Angle and distance

This program calculates a point which lies at an certain angle and a certain offset from the line A-B.
PRG

6
ENT

Select program 61 and press ENT.

Select 10:17 1 Line intersec. 2 Curve inters. 3 Miscellaneous

3
ENT

Select 3 (Miscellaneous) and press ENT.

Select 10:17 4 Angle & dist. 5 Config. 6 Main menu

4

Select 4 (Angle & dist.)

See next page 4.3.301

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

3.4-Angle and distance

P61 10:17 Point A Pno=_

1
ENT

Key in the point number for point A and press ENT.

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88345.862 E=99136.879

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Point B Pno=_

5
ENT

Key in the point number for point B and press ENT.

See next page

4.3.302

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

3.4-Angle and distance

Enter Area & Select device

P61 10:17 Ok? N=88279.753 E=99153.375

ENT

Press ENT the accept the chosen point or NO to choose another point.

P61 10:17 Angle & dist. Angle=_

1 0
ENT

Key in the angle from point A and press ENT. A positive value means a clockwise angle. In this example we have chosen the angle of +10 gon.

P61 10:17 Angle & dist. Dist from A Dist.=_

5 0
ENT

Key in the distance from point A and press ENT. A positive value means that the offset is towards point B. In this example we have chosen the offset of +50m.

See next page

4.3.303

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 61

3.4-Angle and distance

P61 10:17 N=88296.053 E=99141.246 Store?

ENT

This is the calculated point coordinates. Press ENT to store the point or NO to cancel.

P61 10:17 Pno=_

ENT

Key in a number for the calculated point and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Area=_

ENT

Key in the name of the Areafile in which you wish to store the calculated point and press ENT.

P61 10:17 Pcode=

ENT

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the calculated point. In this case we choose the call the point "TP".

See next page

4.3.304

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 61 - COGO

From previous page

PRG 61

3.4-Angle and distance

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=?

ENT

Do you wish to add an elevation to the point before you store it? If so, press ENT, otherwise press NO.

P61 10:17 Pcode=TP ELE=12.125

ENT

Accept the keyed in elevation with ENT or press NO to reenter it.

P61 10:17 Point stored

Select 10:17 1 Perpend.offset 2 Cent.of circle 3 Stn and offset

Now you return to the Miscellaneous menu. If you wish to step to the main menu, press 6.

4.3.305

PROGRAM 61 - COGO
PRG 61 PRG 61

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Configuration
To speed up the program you can configure it so it fits your needs. The configuration part can be accessed from every section of the program, under menu option 5 from the line intersection menu, under menu option 3 from the curve intersection menu and under menu option 5 from the miscellaneous menu. Here follows an explanation of the feature.

Configuration

Config. 10:17 1 Area change?Yes 2 Store all? No 3 Set out? No

ENT

Config. 10:17 4 Confirm? Yes 5 Keep AB? No

Press the option number you wish to change. Press NO to step from the second screen to the first again.

Area change If this is enabled, you are prompted to key in a new area file for each point you enter. If this is disabled, you will only be prompted for the area for the first point. Store all If this is enabled, the program automatically stores all keyed in point coordinates. Set out If this is enabled, the program gives you the opportunity to turn to set out mode for each point that is calculated. Set out is similar to program 23. Confirm If this is enabled, you are prompted to confirm the coordinates for each point that has been fetched from the area file. Keep AB (does not work in 2, Circle intersections or 3.2 Center of an circle) If this is enabled, the program remembers the coordinates for the first line between A and B. 4.3.306

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 32

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

Program 32 - Angle Measurement Plus

With Angle Meas Plus you can measure multiple rounds of angles, with automatic calculation of "station mean values". The measured angles will be reduced to a final result where you can get a standard deviation for the sightings. You can also configure your own limits for horizontal and vertical angle errors. It is possible to choose between manual or automatic aiming towards the targets to measure. In the latter case youll need a Remote Target (RMT) at every point to measure. In automatic mode you can choose to get the slope distance also in C2.

4.3.307

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

PRG 32 PRG 32

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

Configuration
To speed up the program you can configure it so it fits your needs. The configuration part can be accessed by a long press on the PRG-key. Then choose program 32, Angle Meas Plus and press ENT. Choose option 2, Config and then 2 Options.

Configuration

P32 10:17 Error limits HA Point=0.0200

If you get a deviation larger than this value the program will show an error message. This error limit is only to make shure that you measure towards the correct target.

ENT

P32 10:17 Error limits HA Point=0.0200 Set=0.0020

ENT

One set= one measurement towards one point i both faces. If you get a difference between two sets that is larger than this value the program will show an error message.

P32 10:17 Error limits VA Point=0.0200

If you get a deviation larger than this value the program will show an error message. This error limit is only to make shure that you measure towards the correct target.

ENT

P32 10:17 Error limits VA Point=0.0200 Set=0.0020

ENT

One set= one measurement towards one point i both faces. If you get a difference between two sets that is larger than this value the program will show an error message.

See next page

4.3.308

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

From previous page

PRG 32

Configuration

P32 10:17 Aim offset Offset=0.0500

This tells how much the instrument will point aside the point to measure, in order to force the user to do the fine adjustment when using a servo driven instrument. Finally choose Exit and then Exit again to quit or Run to start the program.

4.3.309

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

PRG

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

How to use
PRG

32 PRG 32

3
ENT

Select program 32 and press ENT.

How to use

Switches 10:17 1 Elevation? Yes 2 Pcode? Yes 3 Sightings>1 No

ENT

First you will step through a number of switches that you can configure. If you wish to change a switch, press the corresponding number and ENT, otherwise press only ENT.
1. To get questions about IH and SH. 2. Set a point code for each point. 3. Enable this if you wish to do more than one adjustment towards each point in a set. 4. Store Horizontal and Vertical distances instead of SD. (Not possible if you want to measure a distance in CII, Automatic mode.) 5. Enable this if you want the instrument to automatically switch to face 1 between each set. If you wish to runt automatic mode this this must be enabled. 6. Enable this if you want the instrument to point beside each point so that you can do the fine adjustment yourself (only servo). 7. Enable this if you want a new horizontal angle for every set according to the formula 200 gon (180)/no of series. 8. Enable this if you want to get the difference between the highest and lowest measured value. In other case you will get the standard deviation.

Switches 10:17 4 Reg HD/VD? No 5 Set-transit? Yes 6 Aim offset? Yes

ENT

Switches 10:17 7 Adjust HA? Yes 8 Maxmin? Yes

ENT

P32

10:17

No. of points=2

Enter the number of points (2-10) in the set and press ENT.

ENT

See next page 4.3.310

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 32

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

From previous page

P32
How to use

10:17

No. of series=2

Key in the number of repeted measurements you wish to perform and press ENT.

ENT

See page 4.3.321 for 1 Automatic

Select P32 10:17 1 Automatic 2 Manual

Choose 1 Automatic and you'll only have to aim once at the target, then the program will automatically switch face and perform the number of remeasurements you set. In this case we will choose 2 Manual.

1 2 See page 4.3.321

P32 10:17 1 Std 2 D_bar

Choose which mode you wish to measure in, STD or D-bar.

2 GDM 640, 650 and Bergstrand only

P32 10:17 1 Normal 2 High res.

1

This display will only appear if you have a Geodimeter 640, 650 or Bergstrand. Read more about this in the Geodimeter System 600 User Manual.

See next page 4.3.311

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 32

How to use Manual

Stn 10:17 Stn=1000

Enter the station number and press ENT.

ENT

Stn 10:17 Stn=1000 Pcode=1

1

Enter a point code for the station and press ENT.

ENT

Stn 10:17 Stn=1000 Pcode=1 IH=X.XXX

ENT

Enter an instrument height and press enter.

Point 1 10:17 Point=2000

Key in a name for the first point and press ENT.

ENT

See next page

4.3.312

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

From previous page

PRG 32

How to use Manual

Point 1 10:17 Point=2000 Incr?

ENT

Do you wish to increment the point number for each new point, press YES or ENT, otherwise press NO.

Point 1 10:17 Point=2000 Pcode=2

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the first point. If you dont wish to have any Pcode leave the line blank and press ENT.

ENT

Point 1 10:17 Point=2000 Pcode=2 SH=X.XXX

ENT

Key in the signal height for the first point and press ENT.

Point 2 10:17 Point=2001

Key in a name for the second point and press ENT.

ENT

See next page

4.3.313

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 32

How to use Manual

Point 2 10:17 Point=2001 Pcode=3

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the second point. If you dont wish to have any Pcode leave the line blank and press ENT.

ENT

Point 2 10:17 Point=2001 Pcode=3 SH=X.XXX

ENT

Key in the signal height for the second point and press ENT.

P32 Job No=2

10:17

Choose in which Job file you wish to store your angle measurements and press ENT.

ENT

P32 10:17 1:Imem on 2:Xmem off 3:Serial off

ENT

Here you select which memory device you wish to store the Job file in by choosing the appropriate number and pressing ENT.

See next page

4.3.314

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

From previous page

PRG 32

How to use Manual

P32 10:17 Aim to point 2000 Press ENT

ENT

Make a coarse aiming towards the first point and press ENT.

P32 10:17 HA: 368.0832 HA ref: 0.0000

Key in a starting (first) reference angle and press ENT. Note. This will only appear if you have answered YES to AdjustHA in the menu Switches.

ENT

D 0 10:17* HA: 0.0021 VA: 102.2821

A/M

Do the fine adjustment towards the point and press A/M to measure or REG to store without measuring. In the second case you will be prompted the following:

No meas. made REG OK?

Press YES or ENT to accept or NO to cancel. This is the first sighting towards point 2000 in face 1. Press REG to store the measurement.

C1, Point 2000

D HA: VA: SD:

10:17* 0.0021 102.2821 244.903

REG

See next page

4.3.315

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 32

10:17*

How to use Manual

Another sighting?

If you have enabled switch no 3 this display will appear. Press YES or ENT to make another sighting or NO to cancel.

NO

P32 10:17 Aim to point 2001 Press ENT

ENT

Make a coarse aiming towards the second point and press ENT.

D 0 10:17* HA: 6.8596 VA: 101.1072

Do the fine adjustment towards the point and press A/M to measure or REG to store without measuring. In the second case you will be prompted the following:

No meas. made REG OK?

A/M

Press YES or ENT to accept or NO to cancel.

C1, Point 2001

D HA: VA: SD:

10:17* 6.8596 101.1072 372.290

REG

This is the first sighting towards point 2001 in face 1. Press REG to store the measurement.

See next page

4.3.316

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

From previous page

PRG 32

10:17*

How to use Manual

Another sighting?

If you have enabled switch no 3 this display will appear. Press YES or ENT to make another sighting or NO to cancel. Switch to face 2 (automatic if you have a servo instrument). The following display appears if you have a mechanical instrument (disappears when you get within 1gon of the point):
P32 Aim to point 2001 dHA:199 dVA:197 10:17

NO

C2, Point 2001

or

A/M

Aim towards the second point 2001 in face 2 and press the A/M key on the back of the instrument.

C2, Point 2000

or

A/M

Aim towards the first point 2000 in face 2 and press the A/M key on the back of the instrument. If switch no 5 is enabled the instrument will automatically switch to face no 1 (servo only).

D HA: VA:

0/1 10:17* 100.0021 102.2815

Press A/M to measure or REG to store without measuring. In the second case you will be prompted the following:

No meas. made REG OK?

A/M

Press YES or ENT to accept or NO to cancel.

See next page

4.3.317

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 32

How to use Manual

D HA: VA: SD:

0/1 10:17* 100.0021 102.2815 244.903

REG

This is the second measurement towards point 2000 in face 1. Press REG to store the measurement.

C1, Point 2000

D 0/1 10:17* HA: 106.8589 VA: 101.1072

A/M

Press A/M to measure or REG to store without measuring. In the second case you will be prompted the following:

No meas. made REG OK?

Press YES or ENT to accept or NO to cancel.

C1, Point 2001

D HA: VA: SD:

0/1 10:17* 106.8589 101.1072 372.290

REG

This is the second measurement towards point 2001 in face 1. Press REG to store the measurement. Switch to face 2 (automatic if you have a servo instrument). The following display appears if you have a mechanical instrument (disappears when you get within 1gon of the point):
P32 10:17 Aim to point 2001 dHA:199 dVA:197

C2, Point 2001

or

A/M

Aim towards the second point 2001 in face 2 and press the A/M key on the back of the instrument.

See next page 4.3.318

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

From previous page

PRG 32

How to use Manual

or

A/M

Aim towards the first point 2000 in face 2 and press the A/M key on the back of the instrument. If switch no 5 is enabled the instrument will automatically switch to face no 1 (servo only).

C2, Point 2000

Point 1 10:17 Diff HA:0.0011 Diff VA:0.0004 Diff SD:0.000

ENT

Here are the differences for the first point (if you have 3 or more points this will be presented as standard deviations). If you wish to view all the deviations press YES or ENT, otherwise press NO. When running the program you will get an error message as soon as the program discovers a difference larger than the limits you have set.

Point 2 10:17 Diff HA:0.0010 Diff VA:0.0004 Diff SD:0.000

ENT

Here are the differences for the second point. Press ENT to continue.

A final reduction will automatically be stored in the Job file.

P32 10:17 Sort JOB file?

Do you wish to sort the measured data pointwise in the chosen Job-file, press YES or ENT, otherwise press NO.

ENT

See next page 4.3.319

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 32

P32 10:17 Job No=2

Choose a Job file to store the sorted data in.

How to use Manual

ENT

P32 10:17 1:Imem on 2:Xmem off 3:Serial off

ENT

Here you select which memory device you wish to store the Job file in by choosing the appropriate number and pressing ENT.

P0

4.3.320

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

From page 4.3.311

PRG 32

Note - In this mode youll need at least one Remote Target. Enter the number of remeasurements that will be carried out if the measured values lies outside the limits specified in the configuration part of the program (see page 4.3.308) or if the target is temporarily hidden.

P32 10:17 No. of remeas.=2

How to use Autom.

ENT

P32 10:17 Dist. C2?

Do you wish to get the distance measured in C2? If so press YES or ENT.

ENT

4.3.321

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 32

How to use Autom.

Stn 10:17 Stn=1000

Enter the station number and press ENT.

ENT

Stn 10:17 Stn=1000 Pcode=1

1

Enter a point code for the station and press ENT.

ENT

Stn 10:17 Stn=1000 Pcode=1 IH=X.XXX

ENT

Enter an instrument height and press enter.

Point 1 10:17 Point=2000

Key in a name for the first point and press ENT.

ENT

See next page

4.3.322

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

From previous page

PRG 32

How to use Autom.

Point 1 10:17 Point=2000 Incr?

ENT

Do you wish to increment the point number for each new point, press YES or ENT, otherwise press NO.

Point 1 10:17 Point=2000 Pcode=2

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the first point. If you dont wish to have any Pcode leave the line blank and press ENT.

ENT

Point 1 10:17 Point=2000 Pcode=2 SH=X.XXX

ENT

Key in the signal height for the first point and press ENT.

Point 2 10:17 Point=2001

Key in a name for the second point and press ENT.

ENT

See next page

4.3.323

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 32

How to use Autom.

Point 2 10:17 Point=2001 Pcode=3

Here you have the opportunity to choose a Pcode for the second point. If you dont wish to have any Pcode leave the line blank and press ENT.

ENT

Point 2 10:17 Point=2001 Pcode=3 SH=X.XXX

ENT

Key in the signal height for the second point and press ENT.

P32 Job No=2

10:17

Choose in which Job file you wish to store your angle measurements and press ENT.

ENT

P32 10:17 1:Imem on 2:Xmem off 3:Serial off

ENT

Here you select which memory device you wish to store the Job file in by choosing the appropriate number and pressing ENT.

See next page

4.3.324

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

From previous page

PRG 32

How to use Autom.

P32 10:17 Aim to point 2000 Press ENT

ENT

Make a coarse aiming towards the first point and press ENT.

P32 10:17 HA: 368.0832 HA ref: 0.0000

Key in a starting (first) reference angle and press ENT. Note. This will only appear if you have answered YES to AdjustHA in the menu Switches.

ENT

P32 10:17 Searching Please wait

The instrument is searching for the target.

P32

10:17
When target is found the instrument starts the measurement.

Measuring

See next page

4.3.325

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 32

How to use Autom.

P32 10:17 Aim to point 2001 Press ENT

ENT

Make a coarse aiming towards the second point and press ENT.

P32 10:17 Searching Please wait

The instrument is searching for the target.

P32

10:17
When target is found the instrument starts the measurement.

Measuring

See next page

4.3.326

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

From previous page

PRG 32

How to use Autom.

Point 1 10:17 MaxMinHA:0.0006 MaxMinVA:0.0018 MaxMinSD:0.000

ENT

Here are the resulting differences for the first point. When running the program you will get an error message as soon as the program discovers a difference larger than the limits you have set.

Point 2 10:17 MaxMinHA:0.0011 MaxMinVA:0.0004 MaxMinSD:0.000

ENT

Here are the resulting differences for the second point. Press ENT to continue.

P32 10:17 Remeasure?

Press YES or ENT to remeasure and the program will automatically remeasure all targets.

NO

See next page

4.3.327

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 32

P32 10:17 Sort JOB file?

How to use Autom.

Do you wish to sort the measured data pointwise in the chosen Job-file, press YES or ENT, otherwise press NO.

P32 10:17 Job No=2

Choose a Job file to store the sorted data in.

ENT

P32 10:17 1:Imem on 2:Xmem off 3:Serial off

ENT

Here you select which memory device you wish to store the Job file in by choosing the appropriate number and pressing ENT.

P0

4.3.328

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 32

PROGRAM 32 - ANGLE MEASUREMENT PLUS

Text
Job No Stn No Pcode IH Pno Pcode SH HA VA SD Pno Pcode SH HA VA SD Pno HAII VAII SD* Pno HAII VAII SD* Pno HA VA SD Pno HA VA SD Pno HAII VAII SD* Pno HAII VAII SD* Info Pno Pcode SH HA VA SD Info Info Info Pno Pcode

Label
50=32 2=1000 4=1 3=1.573 5=2000 4=2 6=1.453 7=0.0021 8=102.2819 9=244.9033 5=2001 4=2 6=1.526 7=6.8596 8=101.1070 9=372.2901 5=2001 17=206.8614 18=298.8936 9=180.9999 5=2000 17=200.0037 18=297.7190 9=120.1256 5=2000 7=100.0016 8=102.2813 9=244.9033 5=2001 7=106.8588 8=101.1071 9=372.2900 5=2001 17=306.8603 18=298.8926 9=111.0009 5=2000 17=300.0037 18=297.7183 9=145.9997 0=RESULT 5=2000 4=2 6=1.453 7=0.0028 8=102.2814 9=244.9033 0=S_devHA:0.0011 0=S_devVA:0.0004 0=S_devSD:0.0000 5=2001 4=2

Text
SH HA VA SD Info Info Info Info Pno Pcode SH HA VA Pno Pcode SH HA VA SD Info Pno Pcode SH HA VA SD HAII VAII SD* HA VA SD HAII VAII SD* Pno Pcode SH HA VA SD HAII VAII SD* HA VA SD HAII VAII SD*

Label
6=1.526 7=6.8600 8=101.1069 9=372.2900 0=S_devHA:0.0010 0=S_devVA:0.0004 0=S_devSD:0.0000 0=REDUCED 5=2000 4=2 6=1.453 7=0.0000 8=102.2814 5=2001 4=2 6=1.526 7=6.8572 8=101.1069 9=372.2900 0=SORTED 5=2000 4=2 6=1.453 7=0.0021 8=102.2819 9=244.9033 17=200.0037 18=297.7190 9=201.8769 7=100.0016 8=102.2813 9=244.9033 17=300.0037 18=297.7183 9=201.8876 5=2001 4=2 6=1.526 7=6.8596 8=101.1070 9=372.2901 17=206.8614 18=298.8936 9=300.4655 7=106.8588 8=101.1071 9=372.2900 17=306.8603 18=298.8926 9=344.8777

Registered data

* only in Automatic mode if Distance C2 is chosen.

4.3.329

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 60 - ATHLETICS

In general
Program 60, Athletics, is a program designed for athletics competitions. It can be used for measuring distances in various events such as javelin, discus and hammer. Before you start the program you must enter the following label texts using program 41, Enter Labels: Label 90 91 92 93 Text ROUND NO LENGTH OFFSET Description enter the current round, e.g. javelin1 the number of the entrant the measured distance of the throw, only in meters radial offset for current event, only in meters

60 PRG 60

In general

offset centre

length

landing-point

Geodimeter

Fig. 1 Distance definitions.

4.3.331

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 60 PRG 60

PROGRAM 60 - ATHLETICS

How to use
P0
PRG 60 ENT

Locate the instrument on a suitable point and start program 60. Enter in which Jobfile and in which unit you wish to save the measured data. Aim towards the centre, see fig. on the previous page, and press A/M to measure the point.

How to use

STD HA: VA:

P60 10:16

A/M

STD HA: VA: SD:

P60 10:16
Press REG to registrate the measurement.

REG

STD

P60 10:16

Offset=

Enter the radial offset and press ENT. Javelin=8.00 m Hammer=1.068 m Discus=1.25 m

ENT

STD

P60 10:16

Round=

Enter the round of the event and press ENT, e.g. Hammer round 2 can be expressed as Hammer2.

ENT

See next page 4.3.332

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 60

PROGRAM 60 - ATHLETICS

STD P60 10:16 Entrant No=

Enter the number of the entrant and press ENT.

Athletics
ENT

Measuring mode

STD HA: VA:

P60 10:16

You are now in theodolite mode and can start measuring by pressing the A/M key.

A/M

STD HA: VA: SD:

P60 10:16
Press REG to registrate the measurement.

REG

STD P60 10:16 No= Length= Store ?

YES

The program has now calculated the length. Round off the length to a lower cm, e.g. 95.158=95.15. Press YES or ENT to store the result or NO to continue without storing.

STD

P60 10:16

Round=

Do you wish to continue with a new measurement, press ENT. Otherwise press PRG and 0 to exit the program.

PRG

4.3.333

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 30

PROGRAM 30 - MEASURE COORDINATES

Pno 4

Pno 3

Est. Stn.
1101

Pno 1 Pno 2

4.3.335

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 30 - MEASURE COORDINATES

In general
With Program 30, Measure Coordinates, you can measure and store your coordinates directly to an Area file, i.e you don't have to store the coordinates in a Job file and then transfer them to an Area file. The coordinates can then be used for new station establishments. Program 30 is included in the following programs:

30 PRG 30

In general

Program 23 SetOut Program 24 RefLine

Program 30 Measure Coordinates

Program 29 RoadLine 2D Program 39 RoadLine 3D Program 40 U.D.S

4.3.336

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 30 PRG 30

PROGRAM 30 - MEASURE COORDINATES

How to use
P0
PRG 30 ENT

Assuming that Station Establishment has been carried out at your station point press PRG 30 and ENT to start program 30. The text "Measure Coord" will briefly show on the display and then your Stn number is shown. Press ENT. Note! If the station hasn't been established you're taken to Program 20, Station Establishment.

How to use

P30 10:16 Stn=1_

Note ! 
ENT

P30 10:16 Area=1_

Enter the name of the Area file in which you want to store your coordinates.

ENT

P30 10:16 1:Imem on 2:Xmem off 3:Serial off

ENT

Choose what memory unit you'll use. Toggle between on and off by pressing the corresponding numeric key. Confirm with ENT.

P30 10:16 Pno=_

Enter the number of the point to be measured. Confirm with ENT.

ENT

See next page 4.3.337

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 30

PROGRAM 30 - MEASURE COORDINATES

P30 10:16 Pno=5 Pcode=_

Enter a Pcode and press ENT.

Measure Coordinates
ENT

Note !  Only shown if heights are used.

P30 10:16 Pno=5 Pcode=5 SH=0.000_

ENT

Enter the signal height for the point to be measured and press ENT.

Note ! 

STD P30 10:16* HA: 123.4567 VA: 98.7654

Aim towards the point to be measured and press A/M. Note. It is possible to choose any measurement mode: STD, TRK or Dbar, one or two-face.

A/M

Note !  Only shown if heights are used.

STD P30 10:16* N :1887910.683 E :3950613.782 ELE: 111.125

REG

The coordinates for your measured point are shown in the display. Press REG to store them in the selected Area file.

STD

P30 10:16

more?

Do you want to measure and register more points? In this example we will measure one more point. Press ENT.

ENT

See next page 4.3.338

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 30

PROGRAM 30 - MEASURE COORDINATES

STD P30 10:16 Pno=6

Measure Coordinates
ENT

Enter the number of the point to be measured. (Pno is automatically incremented by 1 for each new point. You can, however, choose whatever number you want). Confirm with ENT.

STD P30 10:16 Pno=6 Pcode=5

Enter a Pcode for the new point and press ENT. (The previously used Pcode is shown default. You have to change this manually). We choose 6 in this example. Press 6 and ENT.

ENT

Note !  Only shown if heights are used.

P30 10:16 Pno=6 Pcode=6 SH=1.800_

ENT

Enter the signal height for the point to be measured and press ENT. (The previously used SH is shown default).

Note ! 

STD P30 10:16* HA: 234.5678 VA: 88.7654

Aim towards the new point to be measured and press A/M. Note. It is possible to choose any measurement mode: STD, TRK or Dbar, one or two-face.

A/M

Note !  Only shown if heights are used.

STD P30 10:16* N :1887832.876 E :3950413.456 ELE: 89.125

REG

The coordinates for your secont point are shown in the display. Press REG to store them in the selected Area file.

See next page 4.3.339

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG

PROGRAM 30 - MEASURE COORDINATES

STD
30

P30 10:16

more?

Do you want to measure and register more points? In this example we are satisfied with two points. Press NO.

Measure Coordinates
NO

P0

10:16

You are now taken to P0.

Temp=20.0

Area File
Stn Stn Coordinates RefObj RefObj Coords HA_ref* HD IH Info, measured point Pno Pcode SH Raw data Measured Coords Next Pno . . . . .

Label No.
2 37,38,(39) 62 37,38,(39) 21 11 3 0 5 4 6 7,8,9 37,38,(39) 5 4 6 7,8,9 37,38,(39) .

Here are the data that can be stored in the Area file you have choosen. * HA_ref for Known Station = calculated and Set HA, HA_ref for Free Station and Known Station+ = Current instrument direction when exiting P20.

4.3.340

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 33

PROGRAM 33 - ROBOTIC LITE

Program 33 - Robotic Lite

Robotic Lite is a program for collecting large amounts of data for volume calculations, terrain models or hydrographic applications. With Robotic Lite you can collect data as a single user. The only requirements are that you have a servo instrument with a tracker and a remote target (RMT). The instrument will follow the RMT and store data with preset intervals. These can either be in form of the time between measurements or the time you have held the RMT still. You need to prepare a UDS before you start Program 33 and the UDS must collect Point number, Pcode, Signal height etc. with automatic incr. and automatic dup.

4.3.341

PROGRAM 33 - ROBOTIC LITE

PRG 33

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

The program is divided in two parts: 1. Time & Dist Enter a time, e.g. 10 seconds and a distance, e.g. 2 meters and the instruments will register data every 10th second, under the condition that you have moved not less than 2 meters from the last point of registration. 2. Stop & Go Enter a time, e.g. 2 seconds and a distance, e.g. 2 meters and the instrument will register data when you have moved more than two meters under the condition that you have held your target still for not less than 2 seconds. A useful function in Stop&Go is that the tracklight is automatically switched on when the program is initiated and starts flashing. When a registration is made the flash stops for 2 seconds and you get a confirmation that the registration is done when the flash starts again. Automatic search If the instrument looses contact with the remote target, it will automatically start searching for the target until it regains contact and locks on to it. Default settings When the program is started it will automatically set the instrument in the following modes: tracking auto centering auto search

4.3.342

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PRG 33

PROGRAM 33 - ROBOTIC LITE

How to use
PRG

PRG 33

3
ENT

Select program 33 and press ENT.

How to use

Stn estab. 10:17 1 Ok 2 Known Station 3 Free Station

ENT

Here you can perform station establishment if you wish. In this case we choose not to and press 1 Ok.

Stn estab. 10:17 4 Known Station+

Select 10:17 Choose between 1 Time & Dist and 2 Stop & Go. In this case we will 1 Time & Dist choose 1 Time & Dist. 2 Stop & Go

Time&Dist Time = 10

10:17 Enter the time interval that must have

passed since the last registration in order to get a new registration.

ENT

See next page 4.3.343

PROGRAM 33 - ROBOTIC LITE

PRG 33

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

How to use

Time&Dist Time = 10 Dist.= 5

10:17

Enter the distance that you must have moved since the last registration in order to get a new registration.

ENT

Time&Dist Time = 10 Dist.= 5 UDS=

ENT

10:17
Enter the UDS you wish to use for your measurement.

Now you are ready to set a search sector.

Time&Dist Aim to A Press ENT

ENT

10:17
Aim the instrument towards the first sector limit and press ENT.

Time&Dist Aim to B Press ENT

ENT

10:17

Aim the instrument towards the second sector limit and press ENT. The sector will automatically be centered if you loose contact with the RMT.

See next page

4.3.344

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

PROGRAM 33 - ROBOTIC LITE

Note ! This is only an example UDS.

From previous page

PRG 33

UDS P3 Job no=_

ENT

10:17

How to use

Key in the Job file in which you wish to store the registrations.

UDS P3 10:17 1 Imem ON 2 Xmem OFF 3 Serial OFF

1
ENT

Select in which memory unit you wish to store the data and press ENT. In this case we select 1 Imem.

UDS P3 STEP1 Pno=1

10:17 Set

This is the first step in the example UDS. Enter the first Point number and press ENT. Set Pno in Auto Incr./Decr.

ENT

UDS P3 10:17 STEP2 Set Pcode=1

ENT

Enter a Pcode for the first point and press ENT. Set Pcode in Auto Dup.

See next page

4.3.345

PROGRAM 33 - ROBOTIC LITE

FIELD CALCULATIONS CHAPTER 3

From previous page

PRG 33

How to use

UDS P3 10:17 STEP3 Set SH=1.000

Enter the signal height for the first point and press ENT. Set SH in Auto Dup.

ENT

TRK P3

10:17

Target not found

Aim to a point where you want to start the measurement. Walk to the point and the instrument will automatically lock on to the RMT and starts to follow.

TRK P3 10:17 Am+ Pcode:1 Pno:4 SH=1.000

PRG

As soon as the target is found and the first registration is performed you can see the information in the display. You are now ready to move on to the next point to measure. To end the program press PRG and 0. Otherwise continue and collect more points.

P0

4.3.346

Appendix A Label List

Text
Info Data Stn IH Pcode Pno SH HA VA SD DHT HD SqrAre Volume Grade Area dH HAII VAII dV Offset HAref Comp Units HAI VAI SVA SHA SHD SHT PPM BM ELE PrismC S N E ELE dN dE dELE UTMSC Slope dHA

No.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 33 35 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45

Description
Information Data used in INFO/DATA combination Station No Instrument Height Point Code Point Number Signal Height Horizontal Angle Vertical Angle Slope distance Vertical Distance (IH and SH not included) Horizontal distance Area of an surface (Result from Program 25) Volume (Result from Program 25) Percent of grade ((DHT/HD) 100) Area file Difference between C1 and C2 horizontal angles** * Horizontal angle which was measured in C2 and stored** Vertical Angle which was measured in C2 and stored** Difference between C2 and C1 vertical angles** Offset constant. Can be added to or subtracted from the SD Horizontal Reference Angle Compensator ON=1, OFF=0 Status of unit set, e.g. Status=3214 (Mills Meter Fahr InchHg) Horizontal angle which was measured in C1 Vertical angle which was measured in C1 Setting out vertical angle Setting out horisontal angle Setting out horizontal distance Setting out height Atmospheric Correction, parts per million (PPM) Benchmark elevation Prism constant Info about Sections (Length tables) in P39 RoadLine Northing coordinates.* Easting coordinates.* Elevation coordinates.*(39=49+STN HT) Relative to stored X (N) coord of set out point (P23) Relative to stored Y (E) coord of set out point (P23) Relative to stored Z (ELE) coord of set out point (P23) Universal Transverse Mercator Scale Factor. Slope inclination Correction value of the calculated bearing (P20)
*Cleared when power OFF **Only Geodimeter Instrument

Appendix A Label List

Text Description
Standard deviation Rel. North Coord. Rel. East Coord. Vertical distance (IH and SH included) (49 = 10+3-6) Job No file for storage of raw and calculated data. Date Time Operator identification Project identification Instrument Number Temperature Empty row in UDS's where it is convenient to have a blank line. Earth Radius Refraction Shot Identity Activity Code Reference Object Diameter Radius Relative humidity in % Wet temperature Northing Coordinate of setting out point Easting Coordinate of setting out point Elevation of setting out point Keyed in radial offset dimension Keyed in right angle offset dimension Calculated radial offset dimension in setting out program. Calculated right angle offset dimension in setting out program Air Pressure Diff. between ELE and SHT (75=29-39) Diff. between setting out distance and measured distance Diff. between setting out bearing and the present instr. pointing Communication protocol parameter settings. Signifies the end of the User Definable Sequence Section or Length table in P39 RoadLine A-parameter Section Interval Center line offset Parabola coefficient Point Height difference Layer number Layer height Profile number Distance from Def.point to Ref.point Labels which can be defined by the user

No.

46 S_dev 47 Nr 48 Er 49 VD 50 JOB No 51 Dat. 52 Time 53 Operat 54 Proj 55 Inst.No 56 Temp 57 Blank 58 EA Rad 59 Refrac 60 ShotID 61 Activ 62 Ref Obj 63 Diam 64 Radius 65 h% 66 t' 67 SON 68 SOE 69 SHT 70 Radoffs 71 Rt.offs 72 Radoffs 73 Rt.offs 74 Press 75 dHT 76 dHD 77 dHA 78 Com 79 END 80 Sec 81 A-param 82 SecInc 83 Cl.ofs. 84 PCoeff. 85 PHt 86 Layer 87 LayerH 88 Profil 89 Dist. 90-99

Info Codes

Info 1 - 4

The following pages will describe the different info codes that can appear in Your Geodimeter. If an error appears frequently the instrument should be left to authorized service. In some cases the info code also includes a device code, e.g 22.3. The most frequent codes are: 1=Serial, 2=Imem, 3=Xmem, 6=Radio, 7=Distance meter If a device code appears, check the info code description. If the code is not described the error is internal and the instrument should be left to authorized service.

Info 1 Compensator out of range

Cause: Action: The instrument is tilted too much. The dual-axis compensator can not compensate for the inclination. Level the instrument or disconnect the dual-axis compensator.

Info 2 Wrong face

Cause: Action: The operation was carried out while the instrument was in an illegal mode. E.g: Trying to measure in the wrong face. Change to face 1, showing angles in the display and retry.

Info 3 Distance already recorded

Cause: Action: The distance to the current object has already been registered. If a new registration is required a new measurement must be carried out.

Info 4 Invalid measurement

Cause: The measurement is invalid, e.g. several measurements towards the same point or the measured points lies 200 gon from each other, P20, Free Station. Trying to perform a calculation which is dependent from a distance without having measured any distance, P20 Free Station and Z/IZ. Check that the circumstances above does not occur and redo the measurement.

Action:

Info Codes
Info 5 Undefined mode or table
Cause: Action: Tries to use a display- or output-table that does not exist. Choose another table or create a new.

Info 5 - 10

Info 6 Vertical angle less than 15gon from horizontal angle

Cause: Action: The vertical angle is less than 15gon from the horizontal angle when performing a Tilt Axis Calibration. Redo the calibration with an increased horizontal angle.

Info 7 Distance not yet measured

Cause: Tries to register without having performed a distance measurement. E.g: when using an U.D.S. which includes labels that are dependent from a distance. Perform a distance measurement before registration.

Action:

Info 8 Bat Low

Cause: Action: The connected battery is drained. Replace the battery with a new and connect the drained battery to a charger.

Info 9 Bat Low in the external unit (Geodat 500)

Cause: Action: The battery connected to the external unit is drained. Replace the battery with a new and connect the drained battery to a charger.

Info 10 No active device

Cause: Action: Tries to register in an U.D.S. without having defined a storage unit. Check that the U.D.S. includes a logon procedure. Restart the U.D.S. and choose a storage unit (IMEM, XMEM or Serial).

Info Codes
Info 15 Not correct section
Cause: Action: You have entered a incorrect section in Program 39.

Info 15 - 20

Check that the given section contains a horizontal and a vertical alignment.

Info 16 Remote Active

Cause: Action: Trying to run Program 22 or Program 28 in remote mode. Switch to manual mode and start the program again.

Info 17 Autolock Active

Cause: Action: Trying to run Program 22 or Program 28 with Autolock on. Switch to manual mode and start the program again.

Info 18 CU not on alidad

Cause: Action: Trying to make a collimation measurement in remote mode. Collimation measurements can only be made from the instrument Start the collimation measurement from the instrument.

Info 19 Communication error

Cause: The cables are not connected correctly or are damaged. The battery is drained. The data for transfer contains errors. Check that the cables are connected properly. Check that the batteries are not drained. Run the transfer again and check if any error appears. If so check the file for any errors and correct them.

Action:

Info 20 Label error

Cause: You have entered a wrong labelnumber. The label does not exist, is not correct or does not contain any data.

Info Codes
Info 21
21.1 Overrun error 21.2 Parity error 21.4 Framing error 21.8 Received brake

Info 21-26

Combinations are possible, e.g. 21.12 means info 21.4 and info 21.8

Cause:

Wrong communication parameters (label 78). The cables are not connected correctly or are damaged. The battery is drained. Check that the same parameters are set in the target unit as in the source unit. Check that the cables are connected properly. Check that batteries are not drained.

Action:

Info 22 No or wrong device connected

Cause: Tries to access a device that is not connected or working.

Info 23 Time out

Cause: Action: An error occured during a communication session. Check that the batteries are not drained. Check that the cables are connected properly.

Info 24 Illegal communication mode

Cause: Action: The operation was carried out while the instrument was in an illegal mode. Set the instrument in face 1, press STD, TRK or D_bar and retry.

Info 25 Real time clock error

Action: Try to set date and time. If that does not help the instrument should be left to authorized service.

Info 26 Change backup battery

Action: The instrument can be used but should be left to authorized service for replacement of the battery. There is a risk for total loss of memory.

Info Codes
Info 27 Option not installed
Cause:

Info 27 - 34

Tries to select a program which is not installed in the instrument. Wrong configuration. E.g. if you try to perform operations that demands a radio side cover, without having such. Choose another program or contact Your local Geodimeter dealer for a program installation. Upgrade your instrument with the radio option.

Action:

Info 29 The current table can not be changed

Cause: Action: Tries to modify the current display- or output-table. To be able to modify the current table, you must first select another table to be the current.

Info 30 Syntax error

Cause: Action: Tries to send a command with illegal syntax on the serial channel. Check the command and change the syntax. Note that only big letter commands are allowed.

Info 31 Out of range

Cause: Tries to choose an illegal display- or output-table. Tries to choose a display- or output-table that does not exist. Tries to create an illegal U.D.S.

Info 32 Not found

Cause: Tries to access a Job- or Area-file that does not exist. Tries to access an illegal program.

Info 33 File record exist

Cause: Illegal way of creating a Job- or Area-file

Info 34 Illegal record separator

Cause: Tries to insert a label in the editor when you have a Job No or Area No in the display.

Info Codes
Info 35 Data error
Cause:

Info 35 - 45

Wrong data input, e.g. value out of range or alpha sign in a numeric value.

Info 36 Memory full

Cause: Too many point codes in the point code library (Program 45) or too many characters in the point codes. Too long display- or output-table. Internal memory full. Use less characters in the point codes. Shorten the tables or use fewer tables. Install more memory at your local dealer or delete unused files.

Action:

Info 41 Wrong label type

Cause: Action: This label type can not be attached to this specific label. Choose another label or use another label type.

Info 42 U.D.S. program memory full

Action: Delete unused U.D.S. programs or shorten the programs.

Info 43 Calculation error

Action: Redo the procedure.

Info 44 Not enough data for calculation

Cause: Action: The program needs more points for the calculation, P20, Free Station. Measure more points and redo the calculation.

Info 45 Incompatible device

Cause: The unit is not compatible. Tries to change format to a Geodat 402/500.

Info Codes
Info 46 GDM power error
Cause: Action: RPU can not switch on GDM.

Info 46 - 54

Redo the procedure. If the error appears again leave the instrument to authorized service.

Info 47 U.D.S call stack error

Cause: Action: You have used call in too many steps (max 4 steps). Check the U.D.S's and decrease the number of calls.

Info 48 No or wrong station establishment

Cause: The station labels has been changed since the station was established. The station is not established. Perform a station establishment. If using a RPU and if the station has been established earlier, fetch station data with menu 66 .

Action:

Info 49 No GDM connected

Cause: Trying to run a function or an application from a detached keyboard unit without having contact with an instrument.

Info 51 Memory lost

Action: Leave the instrument to authorized service.

Info 53 A/D overrange (A/D=Analog/Digital converter circuit)

Cause: Action: Error in the angle measurement system. If the error appears frequently leave the instrument to authorized service.

Info 54 Memory lost

Action: Leave the instrument to authorized service.

Info Codes
Info 103 No carrier
Cause: Action: Disturbance or no contact over the telemetry link.

Info 103 - 155

Change channel or decrease the distance between the RPU and the GDM.

Info 107 Channel busy over the telemetry link

Action: Change channel.

Info 122.6 Radio not connected (Can also show info 22.6)
Cause: The radio is not connected to the Geodimeter. The radio is not switched on. The battery in the radio is drained. The cables are not connected properly or are damaged. Connect the radio to the Geodimeter and switch on the radio.

Action:

Info 123 Time out (Can also show info 23.6)

Cause: Action: The battery in the radio is drained. The cables are not connected properly or are damaged. Check the cable connections and examine the radio battery.

Info 125 Invalid channel

Cause: Action: You have chosen a radio channel that cannot be accessed. Choose another channel and retry.

Info 153 Limit switch engaged

Cause: Tries to position the instrument to an illegal angle.

Info 155 The horizontal positioning is not good enough

Action: If this error appears frequently leave the instrument to authorized service.

Info Codes
Info 156 The vertical positioning is not good enough
Cause:

Info 156 - 167

If this error appears frequently leave the instrument to authorized service.

Info 157 The horizontal & vertical positioning isn't good enough
Action: If this error appears frequently leave the instrument to authorized service.

Info 158 Can not find the target

Cause: The aiming from the RPU is bad. The measuring distance is too long. The measuring beam was obstructed. Try to aim the RPU towards the Station more accurate and remove any obstructing object. If possible try to reduce the measuring distance.

Action:

Info 161 The target is lost

Cause: The aiming from the RPU is bad. The measuring beam is obstructed. The target was moved too fast. Try to aim the RPU towards the Station more accurate and remove any obstructing object. If not in tracking mode, it is important to hold the target still while measuring.

Action:

Info 162 Syntax error (see Info 30) Info 166 No measuring signal from prism
Cause: Action: The distance meter in the instrument or the prism is obstructed. Remove any obstructing object from the instrument and the prism.

Info 167 Collimation error too large

Cause: Action: The collimation error during a test measurement was too large. Increase the measuring distance. It is important to keep the RPU held still during the measurement. If the error does not disappear leave the instrument to authorized service.

Info Codes
Info 174.7 Distance measurement error
Action: Redo measurement.

Info 174 - 241

Info 201 Calculation error (see Info 43) Info 207 Process queue overflow
Cause: Action: Too many commands sent too fast on the serial channel. Wait for the result of one command before you send the next one.

Info 217 RS-232 Buffer Overflow

Cause: Action: Data was sent without an end sign. Make sure that the command contains an end sign.

Info 218 Input string too long

Cause: Action: A command that is too long was sent on the serial channel. Send a shorter command.

Info 241 The RMT needs index

Cause: Action: The control unit doesn't receive angle reference from RMT600TS Tilt RMT600TS past the vertical plumb line and back again. Press the A/M key again.

***